JP5940583B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to, for example, a slot machine. Specifically, the variable display unit is provided with a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and after the variable display unit is variably displayed, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit The present invention relates to a slot machine that can generate a prize according to the display result .

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. Rotation is started by operating, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. . A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles, special roles, and replaying roles. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the special role winning, the player can obtain a profit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. In the winning of the re-gamer, it is possible to obtain a profit that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the number of bets.

  In order for winning of each combination to occur, generally, it is a condition that a winning is made by an internal lottery performed in advance (usually when the start lever is operated). In addition, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination in the internal lottery is aligned with the effective line, and the combination of symbols configuring the winning combination not selected in the internal lottery is not aligned with the effective line. Reel control is performed.

In such a slot machine, it is controlled to ART (assist replay time) as an advantageous state for the player, the winning probability of the re-playing role is increased from the normal time, and when a specific role is won by internal lottery There is one that notifies information that can specify an operation procedure for winning the specific combination (for example, see Patent Document 1) .

JP-A-2005-65863

However, in the slot machine of the Patent Document 1, there is a possibility to reduce the interest of Yu technique.

The present invention has been devised in view of such circumstances, and its object is to provide a slot machine capable of improving the interest of Yu technique.

(1) Provided with a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
After displaying the variable display unit in a variable manner, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the display result,
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result is derived;
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result according to the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation of the derivation operation means;
After the start condition is established, the determination result of the pre-determining means becomes a predetermined result indicating that the predetermined winning is permitted, and a display result different from the predetermined display result for generating the predetermined winning is derived. Preparation state control means for controlling to a predetermined preparation state until an end condition is satisfied;
Advantageous state control means for controlling the advantageous state advantageous to the player over a predetermined normal state;
When the end condition is satisfied in the preparatory state, the control is performed to the normal state. a normal state control means for controlling the pre-Symbol normal state when the end indication results obtained are derived,
A notification period control means for controlling the notification condition at a predetermined trigger in the progress of the game, and controlling the notification period to notify the predetermined information according to the setting of the notification condition;
Subject to the limitation that before Symbol broadcasting period, and a notification means for notifying a result when information corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determining means,
When the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes the specific result, the notification unit notifies the specific result time information corresponding to the specific result,
The derivation control unit is configured to display the end display result when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes the specific result and the derivation operation unit is operated in an end procedure corresponding to the specific result. When the derivation operation means is operated in an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to the specific result, control for deriving a display result different from the end display result is performed.
The advantage of the control related to the notification condition by the notification period control means is higher when it is a period other than the notification period of the period controlled to the advantageous state than when it is in the normal state. The notification period is different between when it is a period other than the notification period of the period controlled in the advantageous state and when it is the notification period of the period controlled in the advantageous state. The control means performs control related to the notification condition,
In pre-Symbol ready, even the notification condition is set without being controlled to the notification period, the predetermined display result by said notification means, even when the determination result of said predetermination means becomes the predetermined result for a given result when information for derivation not be notified, in a state after the termination condition is satisfied is controlled in the broadcasting period by the notification condition is set, the predetermination wherein the predetermined result when information by said notifying means when the determination result of the means becomes the predetermined result Ru is broadcast.
In addition, you may provide the following structures.
By setting the number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result is derived to a variable display device capable of changing the display state. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a winning can be generated according to the display result of the device,
Prior determination means (internal lottery processing) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result is derived to the variable display device;
Derivation operation accepting means (stop switches 8L to 8R) for accepting an operation for deriving a display result from the variable display device;
Means for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation received by the derivation operation reception means, wherein the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined value; In the case of winning one of the nine winning roles (1) to (9), winning one of the promoted replays (1) to (3), winning the falling replay Correspondingly, the derivation operation accepting means in accordance with a predetermined advantageous procedure (procedure for generating winnings of nine winning winning combinations or falling replays winning, procedure for avoiding winnings of falling replays) When an operation is accepted by the player, an advantageous display result (9 images) that is more advantageous to the player than the display result that is derived when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. . The combination of the normal replay during tumble replay winning, the derivation controlling means for performing control to derive a combination) of the promoted replay elevation replay winning reference (reel rotation processing, FIG. 8 (a)),
A means for controlling one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (RT1) and a second game state (RT2), wherein the game state is between the first game state and the second game state. A game state control means for shifting the game (a process for controlling to RT1 when the special game is stopped, a process for controlling to RT2 when a promotion replay is won, see FIG. 6A);
Point granting means (a process for updating the navigation stock number information) for granting a predetermined amount of points (navigation stock number) on condition that a predetermined granting condition (AT lottery condition) is established;
According to the points awarded by the point granting means (controlled by AT over 50 games for 1 navi stock), the predetermined result when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the predetermined result A notification period control means (AT) for notifying the result information corresponding to the notification period control means (AT) for controlling the notification period when the gaming state is the first gaming state or the second gaming state. A first AT lottery process, an AT control process, an AT management process, and FIG.
A period effect executing means for executing a common period effect (non-AT effect) regardless of whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state when the notification period is not controlled. (Processing for executing the game state effect)
The point providing means includes point providing means outside the notification period that gives the point on the condition that the provision condition is satisfied when not controlled during the notification period,
The notification period control means gives the points when the gaming state when the points are awarded by the point outside the reporting period is the first gaming state and when the gaming state is the second gaming state. The notification period is controlled so that the expected value of the number of games to be consumed before the notification period is controlled (see AT activation timing in FIG. 20, modification (3), etc.).

  According to such a configuration, during the notification period, when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a predetermined result, the advantageous display result can be derived by intentionally operating according to the advantageous procedure. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled during the notification period.

  In addition, when the game state when the points are awarded in the non-notification period is the first game state and when the game state is the second game state, it is consumed after the points are given and controlled during the notification period. The expected number of games to play is different. On the other hand, regardless of whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state, the production during the common period is executed, so it is possible to specify which game state is controlled from the production during the period. Can not. As a result, in the non-notification period, it is possible to add the fun that the player expects the gaming state that is actually controlled, and to control the notification period according to the gaming state that is actually controlled. The timing can be changed and the interest of the game can be improved.

(2) The plurality of types of gaming states include the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and can be controlled by the reporting period control unit during the reporting period according to points awarded by the point granting unit. Including a gaming state (specific gaming state) and a predetermined gaming state (normal gaming state) that is not controlled by the reporting period control unit during the reporting period regardless of whether or not points are awarded by the point granting unit;
The notification period control means receives the points when the gaming state when the points are awarded by the point giving means outside the notification period is the predetermined gaming state, rather than when the gaming state is the specific gaming state. The control is performed during the notification period so that the expected value of the number of games to be consumed from the time until the notification period is controlled (see AT activation timing corresponding to the normal gaming state in FIG. 20).

  According to such a configuration, when the points are awarded in a predetermined gaming state that is not controlled during the notification period, the points are controlled at an earlier timing than when the points are awarded in the specific gaming state. For this reason, in a predetermined gaming state, although it is not controlled during the notification period, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for being controlled during the notification period at an early timing after the points are awarded.

(3) The plurality of types of gaming states are different from the first gaming state and the second gaming state, regardless of whether or not points are awarded by the point granting unit, by the reporting period control unit. Including a predetermined gaming state (normal gaming state) that is not controlled by
The gaming state control means controls the first gaming state from the first gaming state to the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined condition is established in the first gaming state (falling replay prize), and from the second gaming state to the predetermined gaming state. (FIG. 6 (a)).

  According to such a configuration, the player has a sense of expectation for being controlled to the second gaming state and a sense of security that the player is not controlled to the predetermined gaming state when being controlled to the second gaming state. You can hold them.

(4) The game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result is derived to the variable display device capable of changing the display state, thereby completing one game. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a winning can be generated according to a display result of the variable display device,
Prior determination means (internal lottery processing) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result is derived to the variable display device;
Derivation operation accepting means (stop switches 8L to 8R) for accepting an operation for deriving a display result from the variable display device;
Means for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation received by the derivation operation reception means, wherein the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined value; In the case of winning one of the nine winning roles (1) to (9), winning one of the promoted replays (1) to (3), winning the falling replay Correspondingly, the derivation operation accepting means in accordance with a predetermined advantageous procedure (procedure for generating winnings of nine winning winning combinations or falling replays winning, procedure for avoiding winnings of falling replays) When an operation is accepted by the player, an advantageous display result (9 images) that is more advantageous to the player than the display result that is derived when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. . The combination of the normal replay during tumble replay winning, the derivation controlling means for performing control to derive a combination) of the promoted replay elevation replay winning reference (reel rotation processing, FIG. 8 (a)),
A means for controlling any one of a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (RT1, RT2), wherein the game state is between the predetermined game state and the specific game state. Game state control means (process for controlling the game state, see FIG. 6 (a)),
Point granting means (a process for updating the navigation stock number information) for granting a predetermined amount of points (navigation stock number) on condition that a predetermined granting condition (AT lottery condition) is established;
According to the points awarded by the point granting means (controlled by AT over 50 games for 1 navi stock), the predetermined result when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the predetermined result Is a means for controlling an informing period (AT) for informing the result information corresponding to, wherein the informing period is controlled when the gaming state is the specific gaming state, and when the gaming state is the predetermined gaming state, Regardless of whether points are awarded by the point granting means, the reporting period control means that is not controlled during the reporting period (first AT lottery process, AT control process, AT management process executed by the sub-control unit 91, see FIG. 20) )When,
An effect execution means (game) during a period of executing an effect during a common period (non-AT effect) regardless of whether the game state is the specific game state or the predetermined game state when the notification period is not controlled. Processing for executing the state effect),
The point providing means includes point providing means outside the notification period that gives the point on the condition that the provision condition is satisfied when not controlled during the notification period,
The notification period control means is provided with the points when the gaming state when the points are awarded by the point outside the reporting period is the predetermined gaming state and when the gaming state is the specific gaming state. The control is performed during the notification period so that the expected value of the number of games to be consumed from the time until the notification period is controlled (see AT activation timing, modification (3), etc. in FIG. 20).

  According to such a configuration, during the notification period, when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a predetermined result, the advantageous display result can be derived by intentionally operating according to the advantageous procedure. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled during the notification period.

  Also, a game that is digested between when the points are given and when they are controlled during the notification period when the gaming state when the points are given during the non-notification period is a predetermined gaming state and when the gaming state is a specific gaming state Expected numbers are different. On the other hand, regardless of whether the game state is the predetermined game state or the specific game state, the production during the common period is executed. Therefore, it is not possible to identify which game state is controlled from the production during the period. As a result, in the non-notification period, it is possible to add the fun that the player expects the gaming state that is actually controlled, and to control the notification period according to the gaming state that is actually controlled. The timing can be changed and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the above (1) and (4), the expected value of the number of games to be digested after the points are awarded until it is controlled during the notification period needs to be digested before being controlled during the notification period, for example. It may be an average value of the number of games with a certain number.

  (5) When the gaming state when the point is awarded by the point outside the reporting period is the predetermined gaming state, the reporting period control unit is more likely to receive the point than when it is the specific gaming state. Control is performed during the notification period so that an expected value of the number of games to be consumed from when it is given to when it is controlled during the notification period (see AT activation timing corresponding to the normal gaming state in FIG. 20).

  According to such a configuration, when the points are awarded in a predetermined gaming state that is not controlled during the notification period, the points are controlled at an earlier timing than when the points are awarded in the specific gaming state. For this reason, in a predetermined gaming state, although it is not controlled during the notification period, the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled during the notification period at an early timing after the points are awarded.

(6) The specific gaming state includes a first gaming state (RT1) and a second gaming state (RT2),
The gaming state control means controls the first gaming state from the first gaming state to the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined condition is established in the first gaming state (falling replay prize), and from the second gaming state to the predetermined gaming state. (FIG. 6 (a)).

  According to such a configuration, the player has a sense of expectation for being controlled to the second gaming state and a sense of security that the player is not controlled to the predetermined gaming state when being controlled to the second gaming state. You can hold them.

  (7) When the gaming state when the point is awarded by the point outside the reporting period is the first gaming state, the reporting period control unit is more relevant than when the gaming state is the second gaming state. Control is performed in the notification period so that an expected value of the number of games to be consumed from when points are awarded until control is performed in the notification period (see AT activation timing corresponding to RT1 in FIG. 20).

  According to such a configuration, when the points are awarded in the first gaming state, the notification period is controlled at an earlier timing than when the points are awarded in the second gaming state. For this reason, in the first gaming state, there is a risk of being controlled to a predetermined gaming state. Can be held by a person.

  (8) When the production during the period is executed by the production execution means during the period, the specific production (expectation production) according to the ratio according to the type of gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means ) Is further provided (for example, see FIG. 21).

  According to such a configuration, even when the effects are being executed during the common period, the specific effects are executed according to the ratio according to the type of the game state. In addition to being able to add interest such as anticipation, it is possible to vary the feeling of expectation when the specific effect is executed according to the proportion of the specific effect being executed in the gaming state that is actually controlled.

(9) Expectation degree information updating means for updating expectation level information (total number of granted points) for specifying the point grant expectation degree when a predetermined point grant expectation degree update condition (point grant condition) is satisfied (in FIG. 12) S1, S2, S10)
The point giving means gives points so that the expected value of the amount of points to be given differs according to the expectation information when the grant condition is satisfied (see the winning rate shown in FIGS. 10 and 11). ).

  According to such a configuration, points are awarded such that the expected value of the point amount given according to the expectation information for specifying the point grant expectation is different. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the expectation level information that gives a point amount advantageous to the player.

  (10) Derived when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure predetermined corresponding to the predetermined result when the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined result. The advantage display result to be displayed is more than the display result (hereinafter also referred to as the non-advantage display result) derived when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantage procedure. The player's game value (medal) is increased, (ii) the game state is controlled to be advantageous in the game after the game, or (iii) the game state is not controlled to be disadvantageous in the game after the game. The display result may be a display result that increases the degree of advantage for the player at least in any one of the points (see the modified example (8)).

  Furthermore, when the procedure for deriving the advantageous display result at the three points (i) to (iii) is different, the three points (i) to (iii) may be comprehensively determined.

  In other words, the advantage display result is more advantageous for the player than the non-advantage display result is that the game value acquired by the player in the game in which the determination result of the predetermining means is a predetermined result is more than the advantage display result. There are more non-advantageous display results, and even if a loss occurs due to the advantageous display results compared to the non-advantageous display results, it becomes an advantageous display result and is controlled to an advantageous gaming state thereafter. As a result, it is a case where the player acquires a gaming value equal to or greater than the loss compared to the case where the gaming state is not controlled to be advantageous.

  Further, the advantage display result is more advantageous for the player than the non-advantage display result. The game value acquired by the player in the game in which the determination result of the predetermining means is a predetermined result is higher than the advantage display result. There are more non-advantageous display results, and even if there is a loss due to the advantageous display results compared to the non-advantageous display results, control to an unfavorable gaming state without resulting in non-advantageous display results As a result, the player obtains a gaming value that is greater than or equal to the loss compared to when the gaming state is controlled to be disadvantageous.

  In addition, the advantage display result is more advantageous to the player than the non-advantageous display result is that the player after the non-advantageous display result is more advantageous than the game state after the advantageous display result. The game value that the player acquires in the game is large even if there is a loss after the advantageous display result as compared to the non-advantageous display result. This is a case where the player obtains a game value in the game that is equal to or more than the loss that will occur after that in comparison with the case where the non-advantageous display result is greater than the non-advantageous display result.

  Further, the derivation control means described above is operated by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure determined in advance corresponding to the predetermined result when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a predetermined result. If it is accepted, if the control for deriving the display result is greater than that when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure, a control with a higher degree of advantage for the player is performed. Good (see modification (8)).

  In addition, the derivation control means performs control for deriving an advantageous display result when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure, and the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It is also possible to perform control so that the advantageous display result is not derived at the time.

  In addition, the derivation control means performs control so that the non-advantageous display result is not derived when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the advantageous procedure, and the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It is also possible to perform a control for deriving a non-advantageous display result when given.

  Further, the derivation control means derives an advantageous display result when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure than when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. You may control so that a ratio may become high.

  In addition, the above derivation control means derives a non-advantageous display result when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure than when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It is also possible to perform control so that the ratio is lower.

More specifically, the following control may be performed.
(10-1) When control is performed to derive a non-advantageous display result when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, and the operation is accepted in an advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result Control may be performed to derive an advantageous display result to which more game values (medals) are given (paid out) than when the non-advantageous display result is derived (see Modification (8)). As a result, in a game in which the determination result of the pre-decision means is a predetermined result, the game value that the player obtains when operated by an advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player increases in terms of increase in the number of players.

    (10-2) When control is performed to derive a non-favorable display result when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, and the operation is accepted in an advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result Alternatively, control may be performed to derive an advantageous display result that is more advantageous to the player than the state after the non-advantageous display result is derived (see Modification (8)).

  More specifically, for example, in a predetermined gaming state, when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, control is performed to derive a non-advantageous display result that does not involve a transition of the gaming state. When an operation is accepted according to an advantageous procedure corresponding to a predetermined result, an advantageous display result with a transition to a gaming state (for example, RT) more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state is derived. It is also possible to perform control (see Modification (8)). In this case, there is no limitation on the game value that the player acquires when the non-advantageous display result is derived and the game value that the player acquires when the advantageous display result is derived. As a result, apart from the degree of advantage in the game in which the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes a predetermined result, the time when operated by the advantageous procedure is more appropriate than when the operation is operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. In the game after the game, it can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is high in that the game state is controlled to be advantageous.

  In addition, for example, in a predetermined gaming state, when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, the gaming state (for example, disadvantageous RT) is more disadvantageous for the player than the predetermined gaming state. Control to derive non-advantageous display results with transition, and control to derive advantageous display results without transition of gaming state when an operation is accepted by an advantageous procedure corresponding to a predetermined result (Refer to Modification (8)). In this case, the game value that the player acquires when the non-advantageous display result is derived and the game value that the player acquires when the advantageous display result is derived are not important. As a result, apart from the degree of advantage in the game in which the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes a predetermined result, the time when operated by the advantageous procedure is more appropriate than when the operation is operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is high in that it is not controlled to a disadvantageous gaming state in the game after the game.

    (10-3) When an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, control is performed to derive the advantageous display result at a predetermined non-advantage rate, and the operation is performed according to the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result. May be controlled to derive an advantageous display result at a predetermined advantageous rate higher than a predetermined non-advantage rate (see Modification (8)). The advantageous display results may be the advantageous display results shown in (10-1) and (10-2). As a result, when the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes a predetermined result, the player is acquired at a higher rate when operated by the advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. The degree of advantage for the player in that at least one of the following points increases the gaming value, is controlled to an advantageous gaming state in the game after the game, or is not controlled to an unfavorable gaming state in the game after the game Can be said to be high.

  Further, when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, a control for deriving a winning display result accompanied with a predetermined non-advantageous amount of game value given at a predetermined non-advantageous ratio is performed. Performing a control for deriving a winning display result accompanied by a predetermined advantageous amount of game value given at a predetermined advantageous rate when an operation is accepted by an advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result; and Non-advantageous proportion, non-advantageous amount, advantageous proportion, and advantageous amount may satisfy the relationship of (advantageous proportion) × (advantageous amount)> (non-advantageous proportion) × (non-advantageous amount) (variation (8) )reference). As a result, when the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes a predetermined result, the game value obtained by the player is greater when operated by the advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player increases in that the expected value of the amount increases.

  The slot machine described above may be a slot machine further provided with a configuration listed below.

(A-1) Expectation degree information update means (S1, S2 in FIG. 12) for updating expectation information for specifying the point grant expectation degree when a predetermined point grant expectation degree update condition (point grant condition) is satisfied. , S10)
Storage means (RAM 91c) for storing updated expectation level information;
Notification conditions (FIG. 10 and FIG. 10) that differ in the degree of advantage for the player in accordance with the point grant expectation degree (total number of grant points) specified from the expectation degree information at a predetermined opportunity in the progress of the game (the lottery condition for the first AT lottery is established) 11 is set, and notification period control means (first AT executed by the sub-control unit 91) that controls the notification period (AT) for notifying predetermined information (navigation effect) according to the notification condition is set. Lottery process, AT management process),
On the condition that it is the notification period (ART), when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes the predetermined result, a result information notification unit (sub-unit) that notifies the result information corresponding to the predetermined result Navigation effect execution process executed by the control unit 91),
As expected degree information indicating the updated point grant expectation degree, accurate expectation degree information that can correctly specify the updated point grant expectation degree, or less advantageous to the player than the updated point grant expectation degree Expectation degree information notifying means (see S4, S6, and S8 in FIG. 12) for notifying inaccurate expectation degree information that can specify the point grant expectation degree set by the notice period control means.

  According to such a configuration, when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a predetermined result, the notification period during which the advantageous display result can be derived by intentionally operating the advantageous procedure is specified from the expectation level information. Control is performed according to notification conditions set so that the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the expected point grant. Therefore, a sense of expectation can be given to the point grant expectation degree in which the notification condition with a high degree of advantage is set.

  In addition, as expectation level information that suggests the updated point grant expectation level, accurate expectation level information that can correctly identify the updated point grant expectation level, or the degree of advantage for the player over the updated point grant expectation level The inaccurate expectation degree information that can specify the point grant expectation degree set by the notice period control means is notified. For this reason, the game gives a sense of expectation that the point granting expectation level for which the notification condition that is actually advantageous to the player is set may be updated rather than the point granting expectation specified from the expectation degree information. Can be held by a person. As a result, it is possible to have a greater sense of expectation than the point grant expectation level specified from the notified expectation level information, while being controlled during the notification period. Further, even when the point granting expectation level for which the notification condition having a relatively low advantage degree for the player is set from the notified expectation degree information is specified, the player's advantage degree is higher than the point granting expectation degree. Since it may actually be updated to the point grant expectation level for which a high notification condition is set, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for being controlled during the notification period.

(A-2) The expectation degree information notifying means, as the expectation degree information that suggests the updated point grant expectation degree, for each of the point grant expectation degrees updated when the point grant expectation degree update condition is established, Including notification determining means (S4 in FIG. 12) for determining whether or not to notify the accurate expectation level information (control to notify the grant point);
The notification determination means is a point at which the probability of determining to notify the accurate expectation level information is updated when the point grant expectation level update condition is established before the point grant expectation level to be determined is updated. The given expectation level is determined so as to differ depending on whether or not the accurate expectation level information is determined to be notified (see FIGS. 15A and 15B).

  According to such a configuration, the probability of determining that the accurate expectation level information is to be notified for each of the point grant expectation levels updated when the point grant expectation level update condition is established, Whether or not it has already been decided to notify accurate expectation information about the point grant expectation updated after the point grant expectation update condition has been established before being updated, that is, whether or not it has been decided not to notify accurate expectation information Can be different. As a result, depending on whether or not it is determined not to notify the accurate expectation level information, the point granting expectation degree updated after the point granting expected degree update condition is established after the point granting expected degree subject to the determination. The probability of determining that accurate expectation level information is to be notified can be changed.

  Note that the above-described notification determination means updates the probability of determining to notify the accurate expectation level information when the point grant expectation degree update condition is satisfied before the point grant expectation level to be determined is updated. Even if the decision is made to be higher when it is not determined to notify the accurate expectation information than when it is determined to notify the accurate expectation information about the expected point grant, Good.

  In this case, when it is determined not to notify the accurate expectation information more than when it is already determined to notify the accurate expectation information (that is, when it is determined not to notify the accurate expectation information) (ie, when the accurate expectation information is determined) (When it is determined not to notify the degree information), it is determined that the accurate expectation information is notified with a high probability. It is possible to prevent the difference between the point grant expectation degree and the actually updated point grant expectation degree from becoming too large and the reliability of the expectation degree information from being excessively lowered.

(A-3-1) The degree-of-expectation information notifying means indicates the degree-of-interest information indicating the updated point-granting expectation degree for each of the point-giving expectation degrees updated when the point-giving expectation degree update condition is satisfied Including notification determining means (S6 in FIG. 12) for determining whether or not to notify the accurate expectation level information (control to notify the granted point),
The notification determining means performs the determination such that the probability of determining to notify the accurate expectation level information differs according to the point grant expectation level specified from the expectation level information notified before the determination (FIG. 16 (a), (b), etc., see Modification (9)).

  According to such a configuration, the probability of determining that accurate expectation level information is to be notified for each point grant expectation level that is updated when the point grant expectation level update condition is established is determined from the expectation level information that has been notified before the determination. It can be made different according to the specified point grant expectation. Thereby, according to the point grant expected degree specified from the notified expectation degree information, it is determined that accurate expectation degree information is notified about the point grant expected degree updated after the point grant expected degree update condition is satisfied. Probability can be changed.

  It should be noted that the notification determining means described above is a player whose probability of determining to notify the accurate expectation level information is that the point granting expectation level specified from the expectation level information notified before the determination is a predetermined amount. The determination is made so that the probability that it is determined that the accurate expectation level information is notified is higher when the point grant expectation level is set with a notification condition with a lower degree of advantage than when it is the predetermined amount. It may be a thing.

  In this case, it is determined that the degree of expected point information specified from the degree of expectation information is the point degree of expectation for which a notification condition having a low degree of advantage for the player is set, and that the expected degree of accuracy information is notified with higher probability. The On the other hand, as the point grant expectation specified from the expectation information is a point grant expectation for which a notification condition with a low degree of advantage for the player is set, the player's degree of attention to the notified expectation information is higher. high. Therefore, at the stage where the player's attention level is high with respect to the expected degree information to be notified, the expectation and the sense of security corresponding to the updated point grant expectation degree are high by notifying the accurate expectation level information with a high probability. The player can be held in proportion.

(A-3-2) The expectation degree information notifying unit can specify the updated point grant expectation degree for each of the point grant expectation degrees updated when the point grant expectation degree update condition is satisfied. Including notification determining means (S6 in FIG. 12) for determining whether or not to perform specific notification control for notifying degree information (control for notifying a given point);
The notification determination means is a point at which the probability of determining to notify the accurate expectation level information is updated when the point grant expectation level update condition is established before the point grant expectation level to be determined is updated. The determination is made so as to differ depending on the expected degree of grant (see FIGS. 16A and 16B).

  According to such a configuration, the probability of determining that the accurate expectation level information is to be notified for each of the point grant expectation levels updated when the point grant expectation level update condition is established, The point grant expectation degree update condition is established before the update, and can be changed according to the updated point grant expectation degree. Thereby, according to the updated point grant expectation, it is possible to change the probability of deciding to report accurate expectation information on the point grant expectation updated after the point grant expectation update condition is established. .

  In addition, the above-described notification determination means updates the probability of determining to notify the accurate expectation level information when the point grant expectation degree update condition is established before the point grant expectation level to be determined is updated. When the point grant expectation is a point grant expectation in which a notification condition that is less advantageous for the player than when the point grant expectation is a predetermined amount is set, the accurate expectation degree information is more accurate than when the point grant expectation is the predetermined amount. The determination may be performed so that the probability of determining the notification increases.

  In this case, it is determined that the expected expectation information is reported with higher probability as the updated point grant expectation is a point grant expectation in which a notification condition having a lower degree of advantage for the player is set. On the other hand, the degree of attention of the player with respect to the expected degree information that is notified increases as the updated degree of expected point assignment is the point provision expected degree at which the notification condition with a low degree of advantage for the player is set. Therefore, at the stage where the player's attention level is high with respect to the expected degree information to be notified, the expectation and the sense of security corresponding to the updated point grant expectation degree are high by notifying the accurate expectation level information with a high probability. The player can be held in proportion.

(A-4) Advantageous state control means (a process for controlling to RT1) for controlling an advantageous state that is more advantageous for the player than a predetermined normal state;
The specified result on condition that the determination result of the prior determination means in the advantageous state is one of a plurality of types of specified results (normal replay + fall replay win, normal replay + fall replay + BAR replay win) Regardless of the type of game, when the end display result (falling replay) that can be derived by the derivation controlling means is derived, the normal state controlling means for controlling to the normal state (control to the normal gaming state when the falling replay wins) Process)
A notification period for notifying predetermined information (navigation effect) in accordance with the point grant expectation degree (total number of grant points) specified from the expectation degree information at a predetermined opportunity in the progress of the game (the lottery condition of the first AT lottery is established) The notification condition (see the winning rate shown in FIGS. 10 and 11) is set so that at least one of the ratio controlled by (AT) and the expected value for the length controlled in the notification period is different, and the notification condition In accordance with the notification period control means (first AT lottery process, AT management process executed by the sub-control unit 91),
An informing means for informing information (a navigation effect execution process executed by the sub-control unit 91),
The derivation control means includes
When the determination result of the prior determination unit is one of the plurality of types of specific results, and when the operation is received by the derivation operation reception unit in an end procedure corresponding to the type of the specific results, Control for deriving the end display result is performed, and when an operation is accepted by the deriving operation accepting unit in an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result, a display result different from the end display result is derived. Control (see FIG. 8A),
When the determination result of the pre-determining means is one of a plurality of types of special results (when winning one of a plurality of types of nine-card combinations that do not overlap the operation procedure for winning), the special results When the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure corresponding to the type of the derivation, the operation is derived when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the type of the special result. Control to derive an advantageous display result that is more advantageous to the player than the display result to be displayed (refer to reel control when winning one of the 9 cards),
The notification means includes
When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes one of the plurality of types of specific results in the advantageous state, the specific result time information (falling) corresponding to the type of the specific results is provided on the condition that it is the notification period. At the time of replay winning, we will inform you of the navigation effect according to the type of winning combination winning simultaneously,
When the determination result of the pre-determining means in the advantageous state is one of the plurality of types of special results, it corresponds to the type of the special results according to a predetermined ratio regardless of whether or not the notification period. The special result information is notified.

  According to such a configuration, in the notification period of the period controlled to the advantageous state, when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes one of a plurality of types of specific results, the type of the specific result is supported. Since the specific result time information is notified, it is possible to operate in the avoidance procedure so as not to derive the end display result. Therefore, when it is controlled to be in an advantageous state, it can be expected to be controlled during the notification period.

  In such a notification period, at least one of the ratio controlled in the notification period and the expected value for the length controlled in the notification period differ according to the point grant expectation specified from the expectation information. Control is performed according to the set notification conditions. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the notification condition having a high ratio controlled in the notification period or the notification condition having a large expectation value for the length controlled in the notification period becomes the point grant expectation degree. .

  Further, when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes one of a plurality of types of special results when controlled to the advantageous state, the special results are determined according to a predetermined ratio regardless of whether or not the notification period. Information on special result corresponding to the type is notified. For this reason, even when it is not controlled during the notification period, during the period controlled in the advantageous state, when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes one of a plurality of special results, the advantageous display is performed at a predetermined ratio. An advantageous procedure can be used to derive the results. As a result, the updated point grant expectation degree is not the point grant expectation degree in which the notification condition having a high ratio of being controlled in the notice period is set and is not controlled in the notice period, or the updated point grant expectation degree However, the player is not satisfied that the notification period has ended in a relatively short period of time, not the point grant expectation level for which the notification condition has a large expected value for the length controlled during the notification period. Pleasure can be reduced, and the occurrence of inconveniences that drastically lower the interest of the game can be prevented.

(A-5) Advantageous state control means (control for controlling to RT1) that controls the advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined normal state;
The specified result on condition that the determination result of the prior determination means in the advantageous state is one of a plurality of types of specified results (normal replay + fall replay win, normal replay + fall replay + BAR replay win) Regardless of the type of game, when the end display result (falling replay) that can be derived by the derivation controlling means is derived, the normal state controlling means for controlling to the normal state (control to the normal gaming state when the falling replay wins) Process)
Notification conditions (see FIG. 5) that the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the point grant expectation degree (total number of grant points) specified from the expectation degree information at a predetermined opportunity in the progress of the game (the lottery condition of the first AT lottery is established). 10 and refer to the winning rate shown in FIG. 11), and a notification period control means (first AT lottery process executed by the sub-control unit 91, AT management) for controlling the notification period to notify predetermined information according to the notification condition Processing) and
When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes one of the plurality of types of specific results in the advantageous state, on the condition that the notification period is within the period controlled to the advantageous state, A notification means (navigation effect execution process executed by the sub-control unit 91) for notifying the specific result time information corresponding to the type of result,
The derivation control means is when the determination result of the prior determination means is one of the plurality of types of specific results, and is operated by the derivation operation receiving means in an end procedure corresponding to the type of the specific results. When accepted, it performs control for deriving the end display result, and when the operation is accepted by the deriving operation accepting means in an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result, Control to derive different display results (see FIG. 8A),
The notification period control means has a predetermined notification promotion condition different from the point grant expectation degree update condition even if the point grant expectation degree specified from the expectation degree information at the predetermined trigger is the same. When there is, the notification condition is set so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the notification promotion condition is not satisfied (see FIG. 19).

  According to such a configuration, in the notification period of the period controlled to the advantageous state, when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes one of a plurality of types of specific results, the type of the specific result is supported. Since the specific result time information is notified, it is possible to operate in the avoidance procedure so as not to derive the end display result. Therefore, when it is controlled to be in an advantageous state, it can be expected to be controlled during the notification period.

  During such a notification period, control is performed according to notification conditions set so that the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the point grant expectation specified from the expectation information. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the point grant expectation degree in which a notification condition advantageous for the player is set.

  In addition, when a predetermined notification promotion condition different from the point grant expectation degree update condition is satisfied, the notification condition is set so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the notification promotion condition is not satisfied. The For this reason, even when the updated point grant expectation level does not become the point grant expectation level for which the notification condition having a high degree of advantage for the player is set, the control is performed during the notification period when the notification promotion condition is satisfied. The player can have a sense of expectation for being played.

(Aa) The notification period control means described above allows the notification condition so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the point grant expectation specified from the expectation information is higher than when the point grant expectation is lower. (See FIGS. 10 and 11)
The expectation degree information notifying means is accurate expectation degree information that can correctly specify the updated point assignment expectation degree, or inaccurate expectation degree information that can specify a point assignment expectation degree smaller than the updated point assignment expectation degree. (See FIGS. 15 and 16).

  In this case, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that a point granting expectation that is greater than the point granting expectation specified from the expectation information may be updated. As a result, it is possible to have a greater sense of expectation than the point grant expectation level specified from the notified expectation level information, while being controlled during the notification period. In addition, even when relatively few point grant expectations are identified from the notified expectation information, it may actually be updated to a point grant expectation that is greater than the point grant expectation The expectation for being controlled during the notification period can be maintained.

(A-b) The notification period control means described above allows the notification condition so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the point grant expectation specified from the expectation information is less than when the point grant expectation is large. Set
The expectation degree information notifying means includes accurate expectation degree information that can specify an updated point grant expectation degree, or inaccurate expectation degree information that can specify a point grant expectation degree that is higher than the updated point grant expectation degree. You may alert | report (refer modification (10)).

  In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the point grant expectation degree actually updated may be less than the point grant expectation degree specified from the expectation degree information. As a result, it is possible to have a greater sense of expectation than the point grant expectation level specified from the notified expectation level information, while being controlled during the notification period. In addition, even when a relatively high point grant expectation is identified from the expected expectation information, since the point grant expectation that is actually updated may be less than the point grant expectation, A sense of expectation for being controlled during the notification period can be maintained.

  (Ac) The degree-of-expectation information notifying means is updated on the condition that the point-granting expectation degree is updated by the degree-of-expectation information updating means in accordance with the establishment of the point-giving expectation degree update condition. Accurate expectation degree information that can correctly specify the expected degree of grant, or the point grant expectation degree in which the notice period control means sets a notice condition that is less advantageous for the player than the updated expected point grant degree Possible inaccurate expectation information may be notified.

  In this case, the expectation to be controlled during the notification period according to the point grant expectation specified from the expectation information that is notified each time the point grant expectation is updated by the expectation information update means. It can be changed in stages. In addition, an interest is added in which the player himself calculates and stores the total amount of expected point grants up to the present from the expectation level information that is notified each time the expected point grant level is updated by the expected level information update means. can do.

  (Ad) The expected degree information notifying unit updates the updated correct point grant when the expected degree information update unit updates the point grant expected degree with the establishment of the point grant expected degree update condition. Expectation degree information that can specify the total amount added to the point grant expectation degree specified from the expectation degree information that has been notified until the point grant expectation degree update condition is satisfied, or the updated point grant expectation An informing condition that is less advantageous to the player than the degree is specified from the expectation level information informed by the informing point control means of the inaccurate point assignment expectation degree until the point assignment expectation degree update condition is satisfied. Expectation degree information that can specify the total amount added to the point grant expectation level may be notified.

  In this case, according to the total amount of the point grant expectation specified from the expectation information that is notified each time the point grant expectation is updated by the expectation information update means, the control is performed during the notification period. Expectation can be changed step by step. Further, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the notified total amount of point grant expectation.

  (Ae) The notification condition may be a condition related to the control for the notification period. The notification condition may be, for example, a condition related to whether or not to start the notification period. More specifically, the notification condition relating to whether or not to start the notification period is (a) determined to control to the notification period in the slot machine that controls to the notification period on condition that it is determined to control to the notification period. (I) a ratio for determining the number of games reached until the control to the notification period is started in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on condition that the number of games reached has reached the determined number of reached games; (C) Notification in the slot machine that controls during the notification period on condition that the number of advantageous procedures from which the advantageous display result has been derived when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes a predetermined result has reached the determined number of arrivals. It may be a ratio that determines the number of times of arrival until the control to the period is started (see the modified example (29)).

  In the case of (a) above, the notification period control is performed so that the degree of expected point grant specified from the degree of expectation information is higher for the player (for example, the more points are), the higher the degree of advantage for the player is. The means sets a notification condition that is determined to be controlled during the notification period at a high rate (for example, refer to the winning rate of “0-2” and the winning rate of “6-9” in FIG. 10). In the case of (i) above, the notification period control is performed so that the degree of point grant expectation specified from the degree of expectation information is higher for the player (for example, the more points are), the higher the degree of advantage for the player is. The means sets a notification condition for determining a smaller number of reached games at a high rate (see Modification (29)). In the case of the above (c), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of point grant expectation specified from the degree of expectation information is higher for the player (for example, the more points are), the higher the degree of advantage for the player is. The means sets a notification condition for determining a smaller number of times of arrival at a high rate (see Modification (29)).

  Further, the notification condition may be, for example, a condition related to a period controlled in the notification period. More specifically, the notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period is (d) control on the notification period on condition that the number of games digested in the notification period has reached the determined end game number. The ratio of determining the number of end games in the slot machine to be ended, (e) The end lottery is executed according to the end probability determined in advance in the notification period, and the control to the notification period is performed on condition that the winning in the end lottery is won. The ratio for determining the termination probability in the slot machine to be terminated, (f) The notification on condition that the determination result of the predetermination means becomes a predetermined result in the notification period and the corresponding result information has been notified reaches the specified number of times. It may be a ratio for determining the specified number of times in the slot machine that finishes controlling the period (see the modified example (29)).

  In the case of (d) above, the notification period control is performed so that the degree of expected point grant specified from the degree of expectation information increases as the degree of advantage for the player increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a larger number of finished games at a high rate (see, for example, a winning rate of “0-2” and a winning rate of “6-9” in FIG. 10). In the case of the above (e), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of point grant expectation specified from the degree of expectation information is higher for the player (for example, the more points are), the higher the degree of advantage for the player is. The means sets a notification condition for determining a lower end probability at a high rate (see Modification (29)). In the case of the above (f), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of expectation given points specified from the degree of expectation information is higher for the player (for example, the more points are), the higher the degree of advantage for the player is. A means sets the alerting | reporting conditions which determine the more specified frequency | count by a high ratio (refer modification (29)).

  In addition, the notification condition is, for example, (g) a slot in which whether or not to notify corresponding result information when the determination result of the pre-determining means becomes a predetermined result during the notification period, and which is notified when winning is determined. It may be the ratio that determines the winning probability in the machine. In the case of the above (ki), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of expected point grant specified from the degree of expectation information increases as the degree of advantage for the player increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a higher winning probability at a high rate (see Modification (29)).

  The notification condition may be any of the above (a) to (ki), or may be selectively combined among the above (a) to (ki). Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (a) to (ki) or selectively combined, the higher the degree of advantage for the player, the higher the point grant expectation specified from the expectation information (for example, Since the notification condition is set so that the degree of advantage for the player becomes higher as the number of points increases, the player can advance the game while expecting it, and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the slot machine that adopts (b) or (c) as the notification condition, it can be derived when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes a specific result among the predetermined results according to the notification condition. When a predetermined end display result is derived, control is performed during an out-of-period notification enabling period for notifying the result information corresponding to the specific result, except for the notification period of the period controlled to the gaming state that can be in the normal state. A non-period notification possible period control means,
Provided with a non-period notification means for notifying the result information corresponding to the specified result when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specified result on condition that the notification period is outside the period. In this case, the notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period may further include technical matters described below.

  As notification conditions related to whether or not to start the notification period, (h) notification outside the period can be made on condition that the number of games digested in the out-of-period notification period has reached the determined number of out-of-period end games Execute out-of-period end lottery according to the ratio of determining the out-of-period end game in the slot machine that ends the control to the period, and the predetermined out-of-period end probability in the out-of-period notification possible period. The ratio of determining the end-of-period end probability in the slot machine that finishes the control to the out-of-period notification period on condition that the lottery has been won, As a condition that the number of times the corresponding result information has been notified has reached the specified number of times outside the period, the control to end the control period outside the period is terminated. Good rate, be an determining the period out prescribed number of times in Ttomashin (see Modification (30)).

  In the case of the above (ku), the notification period control is performed so that the higher the degree of advantage for the player (for example, the higher the number of points), the higher the degree of advantage for the player. The means sets a notification condition for determining a larger number of out-of-period end games at a high rate (see Modification (30)). In the case of the above (K), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of point grant expectation specified from the degree of expectation information is higher for the player (for example, the more points are), the higher the degree of advantage for the player is. The means sets a notification condition for determining a lower out-of-period termination probability at a high rate (see Modification (30)). In the case of (co), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage given to the player increases as the degree of expected point grant specified from the degree of expectation information is higher (for example, the more points are provided). The means sets a notification condition for determining a larger number of out-of-period prescribed times at a high rate (see Modification (30)).

  In addition, the notification condition is, for example, lottery whether or not to notify corresponding result information when the determination result of the pre-determining means becomes a specific result in the (non-) notifiable period, and notifies when winning. In the slot machine, the ratio for determining the winning probability may be used. In the case of the above (sa), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of expected point grant specified from the degree of expectation information increases as the degree of advantage for the player increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a higher winning probability at a high rate (see Modification (30)).

  The notification condition in the slot machine including the non-period notification possible period control means and the non-period notification means may be any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa), Moreover, what was selectively combined among said (a)-(ki) and said (ku)-(sa) may be sufficient. Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (A) to (K) and the above (K) to (S), or selectively combined, the point grant expected degree specified from the expectation degree information is a game. Since the notification condition is set so that the higher the degree of advantage for the player (for example, the more points), the higher the degree of advantage for the player, the player can proceed with the game with a sense of expectation. Can improve the interest of

  (Af) The notification period control means described above is a length (navigation stock number, predetermined game number) that is uniquely specified from the point grant expectation degree specified from the expectation degree information at a predetermined opportunity in the progress of the game. It may be controlled to a notification period in which predetermined information is notified over a period of digestion, a period in which navigation effects are executed a predetermined number of times, and the like (see Modification (11)). For example, the notification period control means may control the notification period longer when the point grant expectation specified from the expectation information is less than when the point grant expectation is small, or the expectation information It is possible to control the notification period longer when the point grant expectation degree specified from is longer than when the point grant expectation is high. Even when configured in this way, the same effects as described above are obtained.

(B) derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving the display result of the variable display device;
Derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation procedure of the derivation operation means;
A game value giving means (payout process) for giving a predetermined amount of game value to a player when an award of a plurality of types of winnings occurs;
The notification means can specify a procedure (including operation timing, operation order, etc.) for deriving a winning that is allowed to be generated by the prior determination means, on condition that the notification means is controlled. Perform procedure notification control to notify the player of such information,
The advantageous state control means does not end the existence state by allowing the occurrence of the special prize in the advantageous state,
The notification means performs the procedure notification control from the predetermined timing after being controlled to the advantageous state until the set notification period (number of AT continuing games during AT) elapses,
In the advantageous state, the expected value of the amount of gaming value given by the gaming value granting means per game in the advantageous state is a procedure specified from the information notified by the procedure notification means when it is within the notification period. When the derivation operation means is operated, the amount of game value used for setting the bet number is increased, and when it is outside the notification period, the amount of game value used for setting the bet number is larger. (Refer to Modification (33)).

  According to such a configuration, the expected value of the amount of gaming value given when the player is in an advantageous state and within the notification period can be obtained by operating the bet number by operating the procedure specified from the notified information. More than the amount of gaming value used for setting. Further, the advantageous state continues at least as long as no special prize is generated. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the advantageous state ends before the notification period elapses when the player performs a stop operation in a procedure that does not lead to the special winning. As a result, the player does not generate a special prize and performs a stop operation in accordance with the procedure specified from the notified information, so that the player can use the amount of the game to be given when the player is in an advantageous state and within the notification period. Value can be acquired. In addition, after the notification period has elapsed, it is possible to add interest such as generating a special prize and controlling the game to a special game state, thereby improving the fun of the game.

  (C) a carry-over means for carrying over the determination to allow the occurrence of the special prize until the special prize is generated, and a prize that allows the next game to be played without using the gaming value is in the normal state; If the predetermination means decides to allow the occurrence of the special prize (bonus) after the advantageous state (see RT etc.) for performing the control to be derived with a higher probability than when The advantageous state may be terminated when the special prize is generated or when the end display result is derived without ending the advantageous state (see the modified example (33)).

  According to such a configuration, even if it is determined that the occurrence of a special prize is permitted after the advantageous state is started, if the special prize permitted by the determination does not occur, the advantageous state is determined according to the determination. Without being terminated, it is possible to continue control in the advantageous state until the termination display result is derived. For this reason, even if it is determined that the special winning is permitted in the advantageous state, the advantageous state can be continued unless the special winning allowed by the determination is generated, and the special winning is allowed. Compared with the conventional slot machine in which the advantageous state is ended by doing so, the player is not given a sense of loss when controlled to the advantageous state. In addition, since the decision to allow the occurrence of a special prize is carried over after the next game by the carryover means, it has been decided to allow the occurrence of a special prize while being controlled in an advantageous state. It can make you expect.

(D) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. According to the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
And further comprising stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result of the variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The derivation control means includes
It has been determined that the generation of a specific general winning (orange, plum) among the general winnings (small role, replaying role) is permitted, and a combination of symbols (orange-orange-) for generating the specific general winning When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) at which a specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) constituting orange, plum-plum-plum) can be pulled in , A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) is derived. It is determined that the specific general winning award (orange, plum) is allowed to occur, and the specific general winning symbol (oren) is determined. , Plum) when the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing other than the timing at which it can be pulled (outside the pulling range), any of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) Control that does not derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general prize,
The specified general winning symbol (orange, plum) does not stop on any winning line in the variable display area (reserved reel) for which the display result has already been derived, and is still displayed in one or more variable display areas In a state where the result is not derived (a state where any reel is changing), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is displayed for the variable display area (the reel being changed) for which the display result is not yet derived. When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within a pull-in range) that can be pulled in, any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) is won. You may comprise so that the control which derives | leads-out the said specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) may be performed (refer modification (34-1)).

  According to such a configuration, in a conventional slot machine, when a specific winning is won in the internal lottery and when the selected winning is missed, the specific display mode is stopped, so that the winning winning is achieved. You can determine to some extent that you have missed, but if you do not know the specific display mode that stops when you miss, you will not know that you have missed the winning prize, and in this case the prize simply was not won It is possible to solve the problem that it was difficult to determine whether the winning prize was missed or not. That is, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific general winning is permitted, the specific general winning symbol is not stopped in any winning line in the variable display area in which the display result has already been derived, and one or more variable Even in a state where the display result has not yet been derived in the display area, that is, in a state where it is not possible to derive a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize that has already been allowed, leaving a variable display area being fluctuating, If the stop operation means is operated at the timing when the specific general winning symbol can be drawn for the remaining variable display area, the specific general winning symbol is derived on one of the multiple winning lines, so It is decided to allow the occurrence of general winnings, and the combination of symbols to generate the already allowed specific general winnings is derived while leaving the variable display area being changed. Depending on whether a particular regular winning symbols are derived can be not state an even also on one winning line making, it can be easily determined whether or not the missed certain regular winning.

(E) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to a determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. According to the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
And further comprising stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result of the variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The derivation control means includes
It has been determined that the generation of a specific general winning (orange, plum) among the general winnings (small role, replaying role) is permitted, and a combination of symbols (orange-orange-) for generating the specific general winning When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) at which a specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) constituting orange, plum-plum-plum) can be pulled in , A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) is derived. It is determined that the specific general winning award (orange, plum) is allowed to occur, and the specific general winning symbol (oren) is determined. , Plum) when the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing other than the timing at which it can be pulled (outside the pulling range), any of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) Control that does not derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general prize,
Among the two or more variable display areas (stopped reels) for which display results have already been derived, one or more variable display areas (stopped reels) include the plurality of specific general winning symbols (orange, plum). Is stopped on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6), and the remaining of the two or more variable display areas (stopped reels) from which the display result has already been derived In the variable display area (stopped reel), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is not stopped on the one winning line, and the display result is not yet derived in one or more variable display areas. In the absence state (the state where any reel is changing), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is drawn for the variable display area (the changing reel) for which the display result has not yet been derived. When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) that can be inserted, the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is derived on the one winning line. You may comprise so that control may be performed (refer modification (34-1)).

  According to such a configuration, in the conventional slot machine, when a specific winning is won in the internal lottery and when the selected winning is missed, the specific display mode is stopped, so that the winning winning is achieved. You can determine to some extent that you have missed, but if you do not know the specific display mode that stops when you miss, you will not know that you have missed the winning prize, and in this case the prize simply was not won It is possible to solve the problem that it was difficult to determine whether the winning prize was missed or not. That is, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific general winning is permitted, and one or more variable display areas of two or more variable display areas for which display results have already been derived have any one of the specific general winning symbols. Of the two or more variable display areas for which display results have already been derived, and the specific variable pattern is not stopped on the single winning line in the remaining variable display areas. In addition, the display result has not been derived yet in one or more variable display areas, that is, the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winnings with the variable display area being changed cannot be derived. Even if the stop operation means is operated at a timing at which the specific general winning symbol can be drawn in the remaining variable display area, the specific general winning symbol is already stopped on the one winning line. Since the fixed general winning symbol is derived, it is determined that the generation of the specific general winning is allowed, and the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winning is generated with the variable display area being changed. Even if it is not possible, it can be easily determined whether or not a specific general prize has been missed depending on whether or not a specific general prize symbol is derived on one winning line.

  Further, the specific general winning symbols constituting the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings may be the same type of symbols or different symbols. That is, the combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize may be a combination of symbols of the same type or may include different symbols.

  In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, it is preferable to include a notification means for notifying the possibility that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted. If it is informed that there is a possibility that the generation of the specific general winnings is permitted at the stage where the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winnings cannot be derived, the remaining variable display area Operate the stop operation means at the timing when the specific general winning symbol can be drawn in, and the specific general winning symbol is derived on any one of the plurality of winning lines, or the specific general winning symbol has already stopped. It is possible to determine whether or not a specific general winning symbol has been missed depending on whether or not a specific general winning symbol is derived on one winning line. Prize in some cases more than one, whether the missed any particular regular winning can be accurately determined.

(F) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. According to the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
The derivation control means includes
The plurality of variable display areas as a display result in response to the determination that the occurrence of a specific general prize (orange, plum) among the general prizes (small role, re-playing role) is determined. Design for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2) or the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) Control to derive a combination of (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum)
The pre-determining means includes
First determination (orange, plum) to determine that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, the fact that the specific general prize is allowed, and the occurrence of a special general prize different from the specific general prize A second determination (orange + 1 (1), plum +1 (2)), which simultaneously determines the fact that the specific general prize is allowed and the special prize is allowed 3 (Orange + BB (1), Plum + BB (2)), to allow the occurrence of the specific general prize, to allow the occurrence of the special general prize, and to allow the occurrence of the special prize simultaneously It is possible to make a fourth decision to decide (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum +1 (2) + BB (2))
The third decision occupying the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision (orange, plum) and the probability of making the third decision (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) is made. And the probability that the second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2)) and the fourth decision (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum + 1) And the ratio of the probability of the fourth determination occupying the total probability of the sheet (2) + BB (2)) and the first to fourth determinations with different probabilities,
The derivation control means includes
The first pay line (winning line) is established when the first condition that the first decision (orange, plum) or the third decision (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) is satisfied. A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning in the line L1, L2) at a higher rate than the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) Control to derive
The second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum + 1 sheet (2)) or the fourth determination (orange + 1 sheet (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 sheet (2) + BB (2)) When the second condition made is satisfied, the specific general prize is given to the second pay line (win line L3, L4) at a higher rate than the first pay line (win line L1, L2). You may comprise so that control which derives the combination (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating may be performed (refer modification (34-2)).

  According to such a configuration, in a conventional slot machine, it is possible to win a small role alone, a small role and a special role at the same time. It is possible to expect a special role to be won according to the stop mode of the reel by making the stop control used at the time of simultaneous winning of the Since the stop mode at the time of simultaneous winning of special roles is different, it can be determined from the player whether or not the special role is won according to the stop mode, so if the special role is not won The problem that expectation is lost can be solved. That is, when the first determination or the third determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line is derived, and the second determination or When the fourth determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning in the second winning line is derived. That is, when a specific general winning is generated when the first determination or the third determination is made, and when a specific general winning is generated when the second determination or the fourth determination is made. A winning line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is easily derived is different. The ratio of the probability that the third decision is made in the combined probability of the probability that the first decision is made and the probability that the third decision is made, the probability that the second decision is made, and the fourth decision Since the ratio of the probability of the fourth determination to the total probability is different from the probability of being made, the combination of symbols for generating the specific general prize was derived when the specific general prize was generated It is possible to change the degree of expectation that a special winning is permitted by the winning line. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line, a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line. In both cases, it is suggested that special prizes may be allowed to occur, but whether or not special prizes are allowed from the prize line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize is derived. It is impossible to discriminate, and the player's expectation that special winnings are allowed is lost regardless of which winning line the symbol combination for generating a specific general winning is derived. It won't be lost.

(G) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to a determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. According to the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
The derivation control means includes
The plurality of variable display areas as a display result in response to the determination that the occurrence of a specific general prize (orange, plum) among the general prizes (small role, re-playing role) is determined. Design for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2) or the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) Control to derive the combination of (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum),
The pre-determining means includes
First determination (orange, plum) to determine that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, the fact that the specific general prize is allowed, and the occurrence of a special general prize different from the specific general prize A second determination (orange + 1 (1), plum +1 (2)), which simultaneously determines the fact that the specific general prize is allowed and the special prize is allowed 3 (Orange + BB (1), Plum + BB (2)), to allow the occurrence of the specific general prize, to allow the occurrence of the special general prize, and to allow the occurrence of the special prize simultaneously It is possible to make a fourth decision to decide (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum +1 (2) + BB (2))
The sum of the probability of making the first decision (orange, plum) and the probability of making the fourth decision (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 (2) + BB (2)) The ratio of the probability of making the fourth decision in the probability, the probability of making the second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2)) and the third decision (orange + BB ( 1), the first to fourth determinations are performed with different probabilities of the ratio of the probability of the third determination occupying the total probability of the plum + BB (2));
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition in which the first determination (orange, plum) or the fourth determination (orange + 1 sheet (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 sheet (2) + BB (2)) is made is satisfied In addition, a combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings in the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2) at a higher rate than the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) (orange- (Orange-orange, plum-plum-plum)
When the second condition in which the second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum +1 sheet (2)) and the third determination (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) are made is satisfied In addition, a combination of symbols (orange--) for generating the specific general winning in the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) at a higher rate than the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2). You may comprise so that control which derives | leads out orange-orange and plum-plum-plum may be performed (refer modification (34-2)).

  According to such a configuration, when the first determination or the fourth determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line is derived. In the case where the second determination or the third determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning in the second winning line is derived. That is, when a specific general winning is generated when the first determination or the fourth determination is made, and when a specific general winning is generated when the second determination or the third determination is made. A winning line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is easily derived is different. The ratio of the probability that the fourth decision is made in the combined probability of the probability that the first decision is made and the probability that the fourth decision is made, the probability that the second decision is made, and the third decision Since the ratio of the probability of the third decision to the total probability is different from the probability of being made, the combination of symbols for generating the specific general prize was derived when the specific general prize was generated It is possible to change the degree of expectation that a special winning is permitted by the winning line. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line, a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line. In both cases, it is suggested that special prizes may be allowed to occur, but whether or not special prizes are allowed from the prize line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize is derived. It is impossible to discriminate, and the player's expectation that special winnings are allowed is lost regardless of which winning line the symbol combination for generating a specific general winning is derived. It won't be lost.

  The control for deriving the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning at a higher rate than the second winning line in the first winning line means that the first winning line is at the rate of 100%. This includes a control for deriving a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize. Further, the control for deriving the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning in the second winning line at a rate higher than that in the first winning line means that the second winning line is at the rate of 100%. This includes a control for deriving a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize.

  Further, the symbols constituting the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings may be the same type of symbols or different symbols. That is, the combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize may be a combination of symbols of the same type or may include different symbols.

(H) An external test for performing processing for causing the variable display device to derive the same display result as when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation procedure based on operation procedure information for specifying a predetermined operation procedure The apparatus (test apparatus 1200) further includes output means (for example, a sub control unit 91 and an input / output board 1100) for outputting recommended operation procedure information for specifying a predetermined recommended operation procedure.
The output means outputs operation procedure information (recommended operation procedure information) according to the determination result by the prior determination means (see FIG. 23, modification (7)).

  According to such a configuration, in the external test apparatus, it is possible to identify an operation procedure that is likely to be actually performed by the player, and is derived when the operation procedure is performed according to such an operation procedure. A test can be performed based on the display result. As a result, the test can be performed on the assumption that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player.

  The output means outputs information for specifying an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting) (information that can specify the region numbers 1 to 21 for each of the reels 2L to 2R) as the recommended operation procedure information. (Refer to Modification (7)).

  The output means operates as a recommended operation procedure information when a prize determined to be allowed to be generated by the pre-decision means is operated in a predetermined first operation procedure (a predetermined small combination is not awarded). Information for specifying a predetermined second operation procedure to be generated with a higher probability than when a stop operation is performed (see Modification (7)).

  According to such a configuration, in the external test apparatus, it is possible to identify an operation procedure that is likely to be actually performed by the player, and is derived when the operation procedure is performed according to such an operation procedure. A test can be performed based on the display result. As a result, the test can be performed on the assumption that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player.

(I) Special gaming state control means (when a big bonus or a regular bonus is won) that controls to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined normal state when a special winning among the plurality of types of winnings occurs Process to control the bonus corresponding to)
Preparation state control means for controlling to a predetermined preparation state when the special gaming state ends (processing for controlling to the preparation mode after the bonus ends);
Advantageous state control means for controlling the player to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state and the ready state when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied in the ready state (when the special event stops in the preparation mode) Processing for controlling to RT), and
By the derivation control means on the condition that the determination result of the pre-decision means in the preparation state or the advantageous state is a specific result (when normal replay + fall replay win, normal replay + fall replay + BAR replay win) When an end display result (falling replay) that can be derived is derived, normal state control means for controlling to the normal state (processing for controlling to the normal gaming state when the falling replay wins),
A notification condition (a table used for the second AT lottery) is set at a predetermined trigger (satisfaction condition is established) in the progress of the game, and control is performed for a notification period (AT) for notifying predetermined information (navigation effect) according to the notification condition. Notification period control means (second AT lottery process, AT management process executed by the sub-control unit 91);
When the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specific result on the condition that it is the notification period (preparation mode + AT, ART) of the period controlled to the preparation state or the advantageous state, Notification means (navigation effect execution process executed by the sub-control unit 91) for notifying the specific result time information corresponding to the specified result (navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay that is won at the same time in the fall replay win) And
The derivation control means is when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result, and when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an end procedure corresponding to the specific result, the ending control means Control for deriving a display result is performed, and when an operation is accepted by the deriving operation accepting unit with an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to the specific result, control for deriving a display result different from the end display result is performed. (See FIG. 8 (a)).

  According to such a configuration, after the special gaming state is finished, it is controlled to the ready state, and if the advantageous condition is satisfied in the ready state, the advantageous state is controlled, and the end display result is derived in the ready state. Then, the normal state is controlled. For this reason, when the advantageous condition is established before the end display result is derived in the preparatory state after the special gaming state, the advantageous state is controlled.

  The end display result that prevents the transition from the ready state to the advantageous state is derived when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specific result and is operated in the end procedure corresponding to the specific result. When the operation is performed according to an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to, a display result different from the end display result is derived.

  Further, in the notification period of the period controlled to the preparation state, when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes the specific result, the specific result time information corresponding to the specific result is notified.

  As described above, the gaming state in the previous stage of the advantageous state is controlled to the ready state, and the advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous condition is satisfied before the end display result is derived in the ready state. In this preparatory state, when controlled during the notification period, by operating according to the avoidance procedure based on the information on the specific result that is notified, while avoiding the intentional derivation of the end display result, The game can proceed while waiting for establishment. On the other hand, when it is not controlled in the notification period even in the preparation state, it is not possible to avoid intentionally deriving the end display result because the notification means does not notify the specific result time information. There is a higher possibility that the end display result is derived prior to the establishment of and the normal state is controlled without being controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to give a clear degree of advantage to the player depending on whether or not it is controlled during the notification period in the preparation state that is the pre-stage of the advantageous state, and the expectation for being controlled during the notification period is effective. And can enhance the interest of the game.

  Similarly, even in the advantageous state, during the notification period, when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result, information on the specific result corresponding to the specific result is notified. For this reason, in the notification period among the periods controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is avoided that the end display result is intentionally derived by operating in the avoidance procedure based on the information on the specific result to be notified. , The control can be continued in the advantageous state. On the other hand, it is not possible to avoid intentionally deriving the end display result during periods other than the notification period among the periods controlled to the advantageous state, and the end display result is derived and controlled to the normal state. The possibility that it will end up increases. As a result, it is possible to give a clear degree of advantage to the player depending on whether or not it is controlled during the notification period in the advantageous state, effectively increasing the expectation for being controlled during the notification period, and enhancing the interest of the game. Can be improved.

  Note that the notification condition may be a condition related to the control for the notification period. The notification condition may be, for example, a condition related to whether or not to start the notification period. More specifically, the notification condition relating to whether or not to start the notification period is (a) determined to control to the notification period in the slot machine that controls to the notification period on condition that it is determined to control to the notification period. (I) a ratio for determining the number of games reached until the control to the notification period is started in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on condition that the number of games reached has reached the determined number of reached games; (C) A slot that is controlled in the notification period on condition that the number of times of ending avoidance that has led to the display result different from the ending display result when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specified result has been reached. It may be a ratio that determines the number of times of arrival until the control to the notification period is started in the machine (see the modified example (31)).

  In the case of the above (a), in the period controlled in the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition that is determined to be controlled in the notification period at a high rate (see the table in FIG. 18A and the table in FIG. 18D). In the case of (i) above, in the period controlled in the preparation mode or the advantageous state, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state except in the notification period. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a smaller number of reached games at a high rate (see Modification (31)). In the case of (c) above, in the period controlled to the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a smaller number of arrivals at a high rate (see Modification (31)).

  Further, the notification condition may be, for example, a condition related to a period controlled in the notification period. More specifically, the notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period is (d) control on the notification period on condition that the number of games digested in the notification period has reached the determined end game number. The ratio of determining the number of end games in the slot machine to be ended, (e) The end lottery is executed according to the end probability determined in advance in the notification period, and the control to the notification period is performed on condition that the winning in the end lottery is won. The ratio for determining the end probability in the slot machine to be ended, (f) The notification period, provided that the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specific result in the notification period and the number of times the specific result time information has been notified has reached the specified number It may be a ratio for determining the specified number of times in the slot machine that finishes the control to (see the modified example (31)).

  In the case of the above (d), in the period controlled in the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets notification conditions for determining a higher number of finished games at a high rate (see the table in FIG. 18A, the 30G digestion table, and the bonus winning table in FIG. 18D). In the case of the above (e), in the period controlled to the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a lower end probability at a high rate (see Modification (31)). In the case of the above (f), in the period controlled to the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a larger specified number of times at a high rate (see Modification (31)).

  In addition, the notification condition is, for example, (ki) a slot machine that draws whether or not to notify the specific result time information when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes a specific result during the notification period, and notifies when it is won May be a ratio for determining the winning probability. In the case of the above (ki), in the period controlled in the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a higher winning probability at a high rate (see Modification (31)).

  The notification condition may be any of the above (a) to (ki), or may be selectively combined among the above (a) to (ki). Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (a) to (ki) and selectively combined, it is in a normal state except for the notification period in the period controlled to the preparation mode or the advantageous state. Since the notification condition is set so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that at a certain time, the player can advance the game while expecting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the slot machine adopting (b) or (c) as the notification condition, a period during which the gaming state is controlled to be in the normal state when the end display result is derived according to the notification condition. Out of the notification period, the non-period notification possible period control means for controlling to the out-of-period notification possible period for notifying the specific result time information, and
Provided with out-of-period notifying means for notifying specified result information corresponding to the specified result when the determination result of the prior determining means becomes the specified result on condition that the notification period is outside the period In this case, the notification condition relating to whether or not to start the notification period may further include the technical matters described below.

  As notification conditions related to whether or not to start the notification period, (h) notification outside the period can be made on condition that the number of games digested in the out-of-period notification period has reached the determined number of out-of-period end games Execute out-of-period end lottery according to the ratio of determining the out-of-period end game in the slot machine that ends the control to the period, and the predetermined out-of-period end probability in the out-of-period notification possible period. The ratio of determining the end-of-period end probability in the slot machine that finishes the control to the out-of-period notification period on condition that the lottery has been won, The slot for ending the control to the period that can be notified outside the period on condition that the number of times the information on the specific result is notified reaches the prescribed number outside the period. Good rate, be an determining the period out prescribed number of times in Tomashin (see Modification (32)).

  In the case of the above (ku), the notification period control means is set so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in the period controlled in the advantageous state than in the normal period in the period other than the notification period. Sets a notification condition for determining a larger number of out-of-period end games at a high rate (see Modification (32)). In the case of (1) above, the notification period control means is configured so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in the period controlled to the advantageous state than in the normal state except in the notification period. Sets a notification condition for determining a lower out-of-period termination probability at a high rate (see Modification (32)). In the case of (v), the notification period control means is set so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in the period controlled to the advantageous state except for the notification period than in the normal state. Sets a notification condition for determining a higher number of out-of-period prescribed times at a high rate (see Modification (32)).

  In addition, the notification condition is, for example, lottery whether or not to notify the specific result time information when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specific result in the (s) non-period notification possible period, and the notification is made when winning In the slot machine, the ratio for determining the winning probability may be used. In the case of the above (sa), the notification period control means so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in the period controlled in the advantageous state than in the normal state except in the notification period. Sets a notification condition for determining a higher winning probability at a high rate (see Modification (32)).

  The notification condition in the slot machine including the non-period notification possible period control means and the non-period notification means may be any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa), Moreover, what was selectively combined among said (a)-(ki) and said (ku)-(sa) may be sufficient. Even if the notification condition is any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa) or selectively combined, other than the notification period in the period controlled to the advantageous state Since the notification conditions are set so that the player has a higher degree of advantage than in the normal state, the player can advance the game with expectation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

It is a front view showing the whole structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol on each reel which comprises a variable display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the control circuit of a slot machine. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of a winning combination, and the technical matter relevant to a winning combination, (b) is a symbol combination and special combination of a predetermined special appearance. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to an appearance. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a probability state. It is a figure which shows each lottery object combination and determination value number which are acquired based on a game state and a setting value. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning a fall replay, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the special reel control of a middle reel when winning a strawberry. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery conditions used as the opportunity which performs 1st AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table referred in 1st AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table referred in 1st AT lottery. It is a flowchart for demonstrating point related processing. It is a figure for demonstrating point provision conditions. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for determining a grant point. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing difference number corresponding | compatible notification lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing notification lot corresponding to total number. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery conditions used as the opportunity which performs 2nd AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table referred in 2nd AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the number of navigation stock added at the time of alerting | reporting promotion conditions establishment. It is a figure for demonstrating the AT activation timing defined for every navigation stock acquisition opportunity. It is a figure for demonstrating the expectation effect lottery table used for the lottery of expectation effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing alert | lottery lottery in a modification. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control circuit of a slot machine on which a test apparatus for performing a type test and an input / output board for inputting / outputting test information used for the test are mounted.

  Embodiments will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the AT lottery condition is exemplified as the grant condition, and the condition is controlled during the notification period, and the navigation stock is given as a point to be given a predetermined amount on condition that the AT lottery condition is satisfied. The number is exemplified, the point grant condition is exemplified as the point grant expectation degree update condition, and the point is exemplified as the point grant expectation updated when the point grant condition is satisfied.

  FIG. 1 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine according to this embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the internal structure of the slot machine. The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b pivotally supported on a side end of the housing.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are horizontally arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, “melon”, “banana”, “black strawberry”, “white strawberry”, “blank (1) (stars without diagonal lines), respectively. ”,“ Blank (2) (stars with diagonal lines) ”,“ Deca (1) (upper half of stars without diagonal lines) ”,“ Deca (2) (lower half of stars without diagonal lines) ”,“ Red 7 A plurality of types of mutually identifiable symbols such as (black 7), white 7 (white 7), and BAR are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively. In addition, the portions other than the portions on which the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are drawn are white, and light is transmitted with high transmittance. The portions on which the symbols are drawn also correspond to the colors of the symbols. It is designed to transmit light.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIGS. 2 and 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are transferred to the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed changing continuously, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the reference position and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are irradiated with white light from the back side. A reel LED 55 is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  Further, a display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 4) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. There are two types of liquid crystal displays: a non-glare type liquid crystal display with non-glare processing on the surface of the liquid crystal panel and a glare type liquid crystal display with glare processing (gloss processing). In the embodiment, a glare type liquid crystal display in which glare processing is applied to the surface of the display area 51a is used. In addition, a backlight (not shown) that irradiates the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and a concealing member that conceals the inside is further provided on the back surface. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays emitted from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

  Further, on the front door 1b, a medal is inserted using a medal insertion unit 4 into which a medal can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which a medal is paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player). A single BET switch 5 operated when setting the number of bets for a minute, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the gaming state within the range (the normal game described later in this embodiment) MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the state, the preparation mode, and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, and 2 for bonus, medal and bet stored as credits Settlement switch 10 operated when settling the medals used for setting the number (returning medals used for setting credits and bets), game Start switch 7 is operated to start the reels 2L, 2C, stop switch 8L is operated to stop each rotation of the 2R, 8C, 8R, but are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired during a big bonus, regular bonus, and RT described later, and when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 for displaying an error code indicating the contents and a payout display 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 4).

  Further, inside the front door 1b, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, and changing a set value described later A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time or during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, are provided in a hopper tank 34 a provided inside the housing 1 a. (See FIG. 2) The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the side or the medal payout exit 9 side, the inserted medal that is inserted from the medal insertion section 4 and flows down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector (not shown) having a sensor 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), the reel unit 2 including the reel LED 55, the external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, the hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and the hopper tank 34a A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided. .

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus to be described later. Switch 36a, for selecting the validity / invalidity of the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement processing (processing for returning (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later It functions as an automatic settlement switch 36b, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for canceling an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. A reset that functions as a setting switch to change the setting value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery, which will be described later DOO / setting switch 38, a power switch 39 which is operated to turn ON / OFF the power supply is provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line determined according to the gaming state among the winning lines L1 to L6 (see FIG. 1) becomes effective, and the start switch 7 is operated. Is in a valid state, that is, a state where the game can be started. When medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. The winning line L2, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L3, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, which are set across the right-down symbols. , Set up over the upper line of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L4 set across the symbols arranged in the upward direction, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, ie, over the symbols arranged in the V shape. There are six types of winning lines L5, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L6 set across the reverse V-shaped symbols. Has been defined as down, normal game state, preparation mode, RT, big bonus, all winning lines L1~L6 the betting amount prescribed number is set is effective in regular bonus. The winning line is not limited to the lines indicated by L1 to L6, and may include, for example, a line extending over symbols arranged in the middle of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L6. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the game state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any activated pay line L1 to L6, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds). The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment). Random number generation circuit 42 for generating a random number, sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 Circuit 44, motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of flow path switching solenoid 30, and various displays and LEDs connected to game control board 40 The LED drive circuit 47 that controls the power supplied to the slot machine 1 When the voltage is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, an initialization command is not input when the power is turned on or from the main CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 that sometimes gives a reset signal to the main CPU 41a, an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, and an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 A disconnection monitoring IC 50 for monitoring the above and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the main CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It has become so.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number, and in the present embodiment, 0 to 65535 is defined as the range. The main CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 according to the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are processed by software instead of using the random numbers extracted by the hardware random number function as they are. The main CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main) and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function). .

  In the power interruption interrupt process, the execution of other interrupt processes is prohibited with the start of the process. Then, a process of saving all registers that may be in use to the RAM is performed. As a result, it is possible to return to the original processing when the power interruption is restored.

  Next, after all output ports are initialized, a RAM parity is calculated based on all data stored in the RAM, set in a predetermined parity storage area, and RAM access is prohibited. Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 41 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted.

  Thus, in the power interruption processing, the RAM parity at that time is calculated and stored in the parity storage area, and stored in the RAM by comparing with the RAM parity calculated at the next startup. It is possible to check whether the data being processed is normal.

  Next, the reset circuit 49 outputs a reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the voltage rises to a level at which the main control unit 41 can be activated when the power is turned on, and activates the main control unit 41. When the value of the reset counter is counted up without being cleared based on a signal periodically output from the main control unit 41, that is, when the main control unit 41 does not operate for a certain time, The reset signal is output to restart the main control unit 41.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input to the touch panel controller 99.

  The production control board 90 is connected to electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. The electrical components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and a microcomputer including an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an effect driving LED 52, an LED driving circuit 93 for controlling driving of the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling audio output from the speakers 53, 54, Switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from a reset circuit 95 for supplying a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, and switches connected to the effect control board 90 Circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information The clock device 97, the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub-control unit 91; A touch panel controller 99 for performing processing for specifying a position where a touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the devices 56b and 57b, other circuits, and the like are mounted. In response to the command transmitted from the game control board 40 and the output information from the touch panel controller 99, various controls for performing the performance are performed, and each part of the control circuit mounted on the performance control board 90 is directly or Control indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The sub CPU 91a acquires a command from the main control unit 41 based on an input of a strobe (INT) signal output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and performs a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in the reception buffer. Run. In addition, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt at regular intervals and executes a timer interrupt process. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a power interruption interrupt process according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the set value, when the power of the slot machine 1 is in the ON state, it is necessary to turn it off once, and after the setting key switch 37 is turned on, the power of the slot machine 1 needs to be turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned OFF, the game shifts to a state where the game can be started by setting the number of bets. It should be noted that when the power of the slot machine 1 is in an ON state, an operation for turning it OFF once, an operation for turning the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned ON, an operation of the reset / setting switch 38, An operation necessary for setting the set value, such as an operation of the start switch 7 for determining the set value, is referred to as a setting change operation. The setting change operation is not limited to such an operation, and may be any operation as long as it is an operation for setting a setting value.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time clock counter, is stored. General work consists of data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, the total number of medals paid out in the BB, and a winning flag that is initialized at the end of each game (small role, replay ) And a winning flag are stored.

  Special work, data for sending commands to the production control board 90, various software random numbers, etc., data that is initialized only before the start of setting, at the end of each game, at the time of winning and setting changes Winning flag (big bonus, regular bonus) that is initialized at the time (when changing to the setting change mode), gaming state flag for specifying the gaming state of the next game, the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of games This is a work in which the number of remaining games controlled by the RT is stored when the game state is completed (for example, a normal game state described later). In the special work, an example in which the number of remaining games is stored will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games digested after being controlled in the gaming state may be stored.

  The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored, and is set to 1 after 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored.

  Even in the case of shifting to the setting change mode, in principle, information regarding the gaming state (the type of gaming state and the number of remaining games when in the normal gaming state) before the setting changing mode is maintained. Thereby, for example, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode during RT, the game state is controlled such that the replay winning probability of the RT is maintained even after the mode change mode is changed. In addition, when the game is shifted to the setting change mode during the normal game state that ends when the number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, the number of remaining games is also maintained. In addition, when the bonus winning flag is set for the special work and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the winning flag is initialized. For example, in the case of shifting to the setting change mode during the bonus winning, a game in which the winning flag of the bonus is initialized and the winning flag can be set again when winning in the bonus lottery and the replay winning probability of the RT is maintained. Controlled by the state. For this reason, in principle, an area in which a game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored is not initialized in connection with the setting change. As an exception, for example, when the gaming state before transition to the setting change mode is a bonus, a gaming state flag indicating, for example, a preparation mode is stored in relation to the setting change.

  The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied.

  The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a starts up when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, or when only the setting key switch 37 is ON. When the BB ends, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both turned off and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied. At this time, five types of initializations with different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and is performed when a change to the setting change mode is performed, or initialization performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. Yes, in initialization 0, all areas (unused area and unused area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c except for the in-use stack area and the area where the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored (Including the stack area) is initialized and controlled to the initial gaming state.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed when only the setting key switch 37 is ON at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the stack in use in the storage area of the RAM 41c. The area, the area in which the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored, and all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the stop phase work are initialized.

  Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, an example in which initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed at the end of the setting change mode will be described. However, the first game before the setting change mode, during the setting change mode, or after the setting change is performed. May be performed until the start is started (until the start switch 7 is operated). In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost, so the set value work is not initialized.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when a winning symbol is aligned on any winning line of the variable display device 2. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with transition to big bonus and regular bonus, small roles with payout of medals, and setting of bet number. There is a re-player who can start the next game without needing. The big bonus may be indicated as BB, and the regular bonus provided during the big bonus may be indicated as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c.

  FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations, and FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to a symbol combination and a special appearance. 6A is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41, and FIG. 6B shows the transition of the probability state controlled by the sub control unit 91. It is a figure for demonstrating.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), a predetermined condition is established in the preparation mode and the preparation mode controlled by the main control unit 41 after the bonus is ended (the special exit stop described later or Predetermined advantageous conditions are established in RT1 and RT1, which are controlled by running 32 games in a normal gaming state (previously promoted replay winning), and predetermined end conditions are established in RT2 and RT1 which are controlled (described later). It is controlled to any one of a normal gaming state controlled by a falling replay winning), an internal RT controlled when a bonus internal winning is won, and a bonus controlled by a bonus winning. RT1 and RT2 can be said to be more advantageous to the player than the preparation mode and the normal gaming state in that the winning rate of the re-gamer is extremely high as will be described later. RT1 and RT2 may be referred to as RT or a specific gaming state.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, the main control unit 41 can control the gaming state to the preparation mode, RT1, RT2, normal gaming state, internal RT, and bonus, When in a specific gaming state that is RT, the sub control unit 91 provides an assist time that is a notification period in which a navigation effect that notifies the internal lottery result can be executed on the condition that navigation stock is set as will be described later. The production state can be controlled (hereinafter referred to as AT). In the present embodiment, the AT lottery condition is exemplified as the grant condition (see FIG. 9, FIG. 17, etc.), the condition is controlled during the notification period, and a predetermined amount is given on the condition that the AT lottery condition is satisfied. The number of navigation stock is exemplified as a point (see FIG. 10, FIG. 11, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, etc.). On the other hand, when the game state is a normal game state different from the specific game state, the effect state is not controlled by the AT even when the navigation stock is set. Whether or not it is controlled by the AT is specified by whether or not an AT flag indicating that it is controlled by the AT described later is set. A state in which the gaming state is RT and the AT flag is set is also referred to as ART, and a state in which the gaming state is RT but the AT flag is not set is also referred to as non-ART.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6B, the sub-control unit 91 is controlled to a high probability state on condition that the bonus ends or melon winning which will be described later is performed. It is controlled to a low probability state on condition that the number of games is consumed or a bonus is won. When the probability state is a high probability state, or when the gaming state is in a bonus state, a point relating to the probability controlled by the AT is awarded by satisfying a predetermined point granting condition as will be described later. In the present embodiment, a point grant condition is exemplified as the point grant expectation degree update condition (see FIG. 13 and the like), and points are exemplified as the point grant expectation degree updated when the point grant condition is satisfied (see FIG. 13). 14).

  Referring to FIG. 5A, the special combination of the winning combinations includes a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), and a regular bonus.

  The big bonus (1) is won when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The big bonus (2) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When either of the big bonuses (1) or (2) is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus.

  When the big bonus is controlled, the regular bonus is repeatedly controlled until the big bonus ends. While the gaming state is the big bonus, a big bonus medium flag corresponding to the type of the big bonus won is set in the RAM 41c. Further, during the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. That is, while the big bonus medium flag is set to the ON state, the regular bonus medium flag is repeatedly set to the ON state when the regular bonus medium flag is not set to the ON state when the game is started. The

  The big bonuses (1) and (2) are terminated on condition that 270 or more medals have been paid out to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game state is controlled to the internal RT from when the big bonuses (1), (2) and the regular bonus are internally won until winning. In the internal RT, the probability of winning the replay is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  When the big bonus is won, after the big bonus is over, all operations of the player are invalid except for the payment of credits, and the game is controlled in a frozen state in which the game cannot be progressed for a certain period of time. In addition, when the big bonus ends when the stop function is enabled, all operations of the player are invalidated except for the payment of credits, and reset to a stop state in which the game cannot be progressed. Control is performed until the / setting switch 38 is operated. Also, as shown in FIG. 6A, after the big bonus is over, the gaming state is controlled to the preparation mode.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-red 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the regular bonus.

  When the regular bonus is won, the regular bonus is controlled until 12 games are consumed or 8 times. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the game state is controlled to the above-described internal RT until the regular bonus is won after the regular bonus is won internally.

  In addition, when the regular bonus is won, after the regular bonus is over, all operations of the player are invalid except for the payment of credits, and the game is controlled in a frozen state in which the game cannot be progressed for a certain period of time. In addition, when the regular bonus ends when the stop function is enabled, all operations of the player are disabled except for the payment of credits, and reset to a stop state in which the progress of the game becomes impossible Control is performed until the / setting switch 38 is operated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6A, after the regular bonus is ended, the gaming state is controlled to the preparation mode in the same manner as when the big bonus is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, when the probability state controlled by the sub-control unit 91 is a high probability state, when the big bonus or regular bonus is won, the probability state is controlled to a low probability state. After the regular bonus ends, the low probability state is controlled to the high probability state. The high probability state controlled by the end of the big bonus or the regular bonus is continuously controlled until 50 games are consumed or the bonus is won.

  In the present embodiment, in relation to the big bonuses (1), (2) and the regular bonus, the sub control unit 91 controls the effect state to AT when one of the bonuses is won or finished. An AT lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform. The AT lottery includes a first AT lottery for lottery according to the probability according to the total number of points awarded, and a second AT lottery for lottery according to the probability according to the established lottery conditions. ), When the bonus is over, or when a predetermined number of games are consumed in a non-ART. The sub-control unit 91 uses, for example, a random number extracted from a random counter to perform AT lottery to determine whether to control to AT during non-AT and a period during which AT can be controlled. In AT, an AT lottery is performed for the sub-control unit 91 to determine whether to add (extend) a controllable period to the AT.

  Even if one of the big bonus and regular bonus is won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, There will be no winnings. This is because the symbols (“red 7” and “white 7”) constituting the big bonus and the regular bonus are not arranged within 7 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  Next, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the small combinations include strawberry (1), strawberry (2), melon, and nine-piece combination (1) to nine-piece combination (9). Among the small roles, melon is awarded when a combination of “melon-melon-melon” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When melon wins, 9 medals are paid out. In principle, the melon can be awarded regardless of the operation procedure of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. This is because the symbols constituting the melon ("melon") are arranged within 7 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, when the melon is won when the probability state controlled by the sub control unit 91 is the low probability state, whether or not the sub control unit 91 controls the high probability state. A high probability lottery will be held. In addition, when the winning is performed by the high probability state lottery, the sub control unit 91 controls the probability state to the high probability state. The probability of winning in the high probability state lottery is set to 50%, for example. The high-probability state controlled by winning the high-probability state lottery is continuously controlled until 30 games are consumed or a bonus is won.

  In addition, when the probability state controlled by the sub-control unit 91 is a high probability state, the point granting lottery for determining whether or not to give a point related to the winning probability of the first AT lottery is triggered by winning the melon. Executed. In addition, when the melon is won in the low probability state, and when it is won by the high probability state lottery and controlled to the high probability state, the point giving lottery is further executed. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning the melon in the low probability state.

  Next, among the small roles, strawberry (1) becomes a winning when a symbol of “black strawberry” is derived on one of the winning lines for reel 2L, and two medals are paid out. Among the small roles, the strawberry (2) is awarded when the symbol “white strawberry” is derived on one of the winning lines for the reel 2L, and two medals are paid out. These strawberry (1) and strawberry (2) are also simply called strawberry. If the symbol “black strawberry” or “white strawberry” stops at the upper or lower level of the left reel 2L, the winning lines L1, L3, L5 or the winning lines L2, L4, L6 are on the three winning lines. Since winning the strawberry (1) or strawberry (2), 6 medals are paid out.

  If a strawberry is won during the bonus, a notification promoting condition for promoting control by the AT is established, as will be described later with reference to FIG. Specifically, when the notification promoting condition is established by winning a strawberry in the bonus, a process for reliably controlling the AT is performed after the bonus ends. In the present embodiment, the notification promoting condition that is more advantageous for the player is established when the strawberry (2) is won than when the strawberry (2) is not won.

  If a strawberry is won when it is not a bonus, an AT lottery is performed. In addition, if the strawberry (1) or the strawberry (2) is won in the high probability state, the points related to the winning probability of the first AT lottery are always given.

  Further, only in the game where the strawberry (1) or the strawberry (2) is won, special reel control is performed so that a special outcome can be stopped on the winning line. Thereby, even if it is a case where neither a strawberry (1) nor a strawberry (2) is won, a special turn is stopped, and the strawberry (1) or the strawberry (2) is won. This can be notified to the player.

  Next, nine-piece roles (1) to (9) will be described. The 9-piece winning combination (1) is awarded when a combination of “red 7-blank (1) -red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece combination (2) wins when a combination of “white 7-blank (1) -red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (3) is awarded when the combination of “BAR-Blank (1) -Red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (4) is awarded when a combination of “red 7-blank (1) -white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (5) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-blank (1) -white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (6) is awarded when the combination of “BAR-Blank (1) -White 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (7) is awarded when a combination of “red 7-blank (1) -BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (8) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-blank (1) -BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (9) is awarded when the combination of “BAR-Blank (1) -BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the symbols constituting each of the nine-piece roles (1) to (9) are not arranged within 7 frames on the reels 2L and 2R, but are arranged within 7 frames on the reel 2C. ing. For this reason, even if one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won in the internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L and 8R must be operated at an appropriate timing to enable winning of these winning combinations. , I will not win the winning nine-piece role.

  Further, the left symbol and the right symbol constituting each of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) are arranged 7 frames apart on each of the reels 2L and 2R. For this reason, the combination of the operation timings of the stop switches 8L to 8R ("operation procedure") for deriving each of the 9-sheet roles (1) to (9) is different for each of the 9-sheet roles (1) to (9). Can be made. For example, the operation procedure for deriving the nine-piece combination (1) is to operate the stop switch 8L at a timing at which “red 7” of the left reel 2L can be drawn into the pay line, and “red 7” of the right reel 2R. Is a procedure for operating the stop switch 8R at a timing at which can be drawn into the winning line. The operation procedure for deriving the 9-piece combination (9) is that the “BAR” of the left reel 2L is operated at a timing at which the “BAR” can be pulled into the winning line, and the “BAR” of the right reel 2R is won. This is a procedure for operating the stop switch 8R at a timing that can be pulled into the line.

  In a state where it is not recognized which of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won, when the stop switches 8L and 8R are operated, the left symbol and the right constituting the winning nine winning combination The symbol is drawn with a probability of 1/3 × 1/3 = 1/9 and won, and the other 8/9 cannot be drawn and cannot win.

  On the other hand, the nine role combinations (1) to (9) are navigation target combinations in which a navigation effect corresponding to the selected type is executed on the condition that it is the above-described ART. For this reason, when it is ART, information corresponding to the winning nine winning combination is notified. The information corresponding to the type of the winning combination may be, for example, information that can specify the type of the nine winning combination, and the operation procedure for winning the winning nine winning combination can be specified. It may be information. As a result, in ART, the player can recognize the type of the 9 winning combination and can operate the stop switches 8L and 8R at an appropriate timing for winning the notified 9 winning combination. As a result, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of 9-piece missing.

  FIG. 24 also refers to the case where nine winning combinations (1) to (9) are won during the above-described non-ART or during the period from when the RT is controlled to the normal gaming state until the predetermined number of games are consumed. As will be described later, a navigation effect corresponding to the type selected in accordance with a predetermined probability is executed. For this reason, the occurrence of a missing piece can be reduced even when the nine winning combination is not controlled by the AT.

  In addition, when the gaming state is in bonus, points related to the winning probability of the 1st AT lottery will always be given when any of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) wins and wins alone. Is done.

  Next, among the winning combinations, the replaying combination will be described. Among the winning combinations, the replaying role includes normal replay, falling replay, BAR replay, promotion replay (1), promotion replay (2), and promotion replay (3). When you win one of the re-players, you will not be paid out medals, but you can start the next game without setting the number of bets again. This is essentially the same as when medals are paid out.

  The normal replay is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the normal replay (“banana”) are arranged within 7 frames on each reel. Therefore, as a general rule, it can be said that the normal replay is a role that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if the winning is made.

  The tumble replay is awarded when a combination of “melon-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the tumble replay ("melon" on the left reel 2L, "reel" on the middle reel 2C, and "banana" on the right reel 2R) are arranged within 7 frames on each reel. Therefore, it can be said that, as a general rule, the fall replay can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, after winning the fall replay at RT1, the game state is controlled to the normal game state. As will be described later, the fall replay is set not to win in the preparation mode or the internal lottery in RT2, and is set to win in the internal lottery in RT1 with a predetermined probability. For this reason, since it does not win the fall replay in the preparation mode or RT2, it is configured not to be controlled to the normal gaming state from the preparation mode or RT2, and is configured to be controlled to the normal gaming state by the fall replay winning only from RT1. Has been. Further, when winning a fall replay during an AT, the AT ends.

  It should be noted that even in a gaming state other than RT1 (for example, a preparation mode), it is possible to win a fall replay with a predetermined probability (very low probability, 1%), so that a gaming state other than RT1 is changed to a normal gaming state. You may comprise so that it may be controlled.

  The fall replay is a navigation target combination in which a navigation effect corresponding to the selected type of replay is executed on the condition that it is ART. In addition, the fall replay is won in the internal lottery at the same time as the normal replay or the normal replay and the BAR replay, and the operation procedure for the fall replay is different according to the type of the replay that has been won at the same time. For this reason, when it is ART, when the fall replay is won, information according to the type of replay won simultaneously with the fall replay is notified. The information corresponding to the type of replay that was won at the same time as the fall replay may be information that can identify the type of replay that was won at the same time, and the winning of the fall replay according to the type of replay that was won at the same time. It may be information that can specify an operation procedure for avoiding the problem. Thereby, in the case of ART, a fall replay winning can be avoided, and as a result, it can intentionally avoid being controlled to the normal gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case of non-ART, even if the fall replay is won, the navigation effect is not executed, so the fall replay winning can not be intentionally avoided, and there is a possibility of being controlled to the normal gaming state. It can be said that it will increase. In this way, when the fall replay is controlled to the winning RT1, depending on whether or not the production state is AT, the difference in the player's advantage is increased, and the AT lottery is added. In this way, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation for winning the AT and improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), after falling into replay winning at RT1 and controlled to the normal gaming state, the game is controlled to RT1 again by digesting 32 games in the normal gaming state. The

  The BAR replay is awarded when a combination of “BAR-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Among the symbols constituting the BAR replay, the symbols (“banana”) of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are arranged within seven frames on each reel. On the other hand, among the symbols constituting the BAR replay, the symbol (“BAR”) of the left reel 2L is not arranged within seven frames on the left reel 2L. For this reason, even if the BAR replay is won in the internal lottery, the BAR replay is not won unless the stop switch 8L is operated at an appropriate timing.

  The promotion replay (1) is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The promotion replay (2) is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-red 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The promotion replay (3) is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, after winning the promotion replay, it is controlled to RT2. As will be described later, the promotion replay is set not to win in the internal lottery in the preparation mode and the normal gaming state, and is set to win in the internal lottery in RT1 with a predetermined probability. For this reason, in the preparation mode or the normal gaming state, the promotion replay is not won, so the RT2 is not controlled from the preparation mode or the normal gaming state. Only RT2 is controlled.

  It should be noted that even in a gaming state other than RT1 (for example, a preparation mode), the promotion replay can be won with a predetermined probability (very low probability, 1%), and the gaming state other than RT1 is controlled by RT2. You may comprise.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the symbols constituting each of the promoted replays (1) to (3) are not arranged within 7 frames on the reel 2R, but are arranged within 7 frames on the reels 2L and 2C. Yes. For this reason, even if one of the promotion replays (1) to (3) is won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, it is won. You will never win a promotion replay. In the present embodiment, each of the promoted replays (1) to (3) is read simultaneously with the normal replay in the internal lottery at RT1, and the internal lottery is performed. For this reason, when it is not possible to win the promoted replay that has been won, the normal replay is won.

  Further, “BAR”, “Red 7”, and “White 7” of the right symbols constituting each of the promoted replays (1) to (3) are arranged 7 frames apart on the reel 2R. Therefore, the combination of the operation timings of the stop switches 8L to 8R ("operation procedure") for deriving each of the promoted replays (1) to (3) is different for each of the promoted replays (1) to (3). Can do. For example, the operation procedure for deriving the promotion replay (1) refers to a procedure of operating the stop switch 8R at a timing at which “BAR” of the right reel 2R can be drawn into the winning line. Further, the operation procedure for deriving the promotion replay (2) is a procedure of operating the stop switch 8R at a timing at which “red 7” of the right reel 2R can be drawn into the pay line. Further, the operation procedure for deriving the promotion replay (3) is a procedure of operating the stop switch 8R at a timing at which “white 7” of the right reel 2R can be drawn into the pay line. Thus, in the present embodiment, the operation procedure (avoidance procedure) is made different by changing the operation timing of the stop switch 8R for winning the selected promotion replay depending on which type of promotion replay is won. be able to.

  When the stop switch 8R is operated in a state where it is not recognized which of the promoted replays (1) to (3) is won, the right symbol constituting the promoted replay is drawn with a probability of 1/3. It becomes a winning prize, and it cannot be drawn with the probability of 2/3 other than that and it becomes impossible to win.

  On the other hand, the promotion replays (1) to (3) are navigation target roles in which a navigation effect corresponding to the selected type is executed on the condition that the above-mentioned ART is used. For this reason, when it is ART, the information according to the elected promotion replay is notified. The information corresponding to the type of the winning combination may be, for example, information that can identify the type of the promoted replay that has been won, or information that can identify the operation procedure for winning the promoted replay that has been won. There may be. Thereby, in ART, the player can recognize the type of the promoted replay that has been won, and can operate the stop switch 8R at an appropriate timing for winning the notified promoted replay. As a result, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of missed promotion replays, and it is possible to intentionally win the promoted replays that are selected when controlled by the AT in RT1 and allow RT2 to control them.

  On the other hand, in the case of non-ART, even when the promotion replay is won, the navigation effect is not executed. Therefore, the promotion replay cannot be won deliberately, and the opportunity to control the RT2 is missed. It can be said that the possibility of winning a fall replay is increased and the possibility of being controlled in the normal gaming state is increased. In this way, when it is RT1, depending on whether or not the production state is AT, the difference in the degree of advantage of the player is increased, and the sense of expectation for winning the AT in the AT lottery is effective. Can increase the interest of the game.

  Next, the special appearance will be described with reference to FIG. For the special outcome, the symbol of the left reel 2L among the symbol combinations (9) (1) to (9) on any of the winning lines is “red 7 / white 7 / BAR (“ / ”is“ or ” "Meaning") is replaced with "blank (2)" in three types of combinations (blank (2) -blank (1) -red 7 / white 7 / BAR), and the pattern of the right reel 2R is "red 7". / White 7 / BAR "is replaced with" Blank (1) "(Red 7 / White 7 / BAR-Blank (1) -Blank (1)), and the design of the left reel 2L is" Blank (2 ) "And a combination (blank (2) -blank (1) -blank (1)) in which the design of the right reel 2R is replaced with" blank (1) ". In this way, the symbols constituting the special outcome are arranged within 7 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. For this reason, in principle, the special outcome can be stopped at any of the pay lines L1 to L6 regardless of the operation procedure of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  In the present embodiment, the reel control for stopping at any one of the pay lines L1 to L6 in the present embodiment is when any of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won in any gaming state. This is only done when the 9 winning winning combinations are missed. On the other hand, as described above, the special outcome can be stopped at any of the pay lines L1 to L6 regardless of the operation procedure of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Therefore, when any of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won, the symbols constituting the winning nine winning combinations are stopped on any of the winning lines L1 to L6. If this is not possible, the special event can be stopped at any of the winning lines L1 to L6.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, after the special event stops in the preparation mode or RT2, the control is performed by RT1. RT1 is continuously controlled until winning a big bonus or regular bonus, winning a promotion replay, or winning a fall replay. Even if the special game is stopped in the game mode other than the preparation mode or RT2, it is not controlled by RT1. Even if the special outcome is stopped at RT1, the control to RT1 is maintained.

  Next, the internal lottery will be described. In the internal lottery, the variable display device 2 determines whether or not each of the winning combinations described above is permitted, that is, whether or not the symbol combination that generates the winning combination is allowed to perform control for aligning with any winning line. Is determined before the display result is derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is operated). In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number generation circuit 42. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the obtained random number for internal lottery, the gaming state, and the determination value of each winning combination determined according to the set value set by the reset / setting switch 38 Depending on the number.

  Here, a lottery target combination determined for each gaming state as an internal lottery target and the number of determination values of the lottery target combination will be described. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing each lottery target combination and the number of determination values acquired based on the gaming state and the set value. The lottery object combination and the number of determination values shown in FIG. 7 are stored in a predetermined storage area allocated to the ROM 41b, for example. In the internal lottery, the number of determination values determined for the lottery subject in accordance with the game state is sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery extracted at the start of the game, and the addition result overflows a predetermined value (for example, 65536). Sometimes, it is determined that the winning combination for the lottery is won. If the winning combination is determined, the winning flag for the winning combination is set in the RAM 41c.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a lottery target combination and the number of determination values that are internally drawn when the gaming state is the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, the lottery target is the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, normal replay, normal replay + fall replay, normal replay + fall replay + BAR replay, normal replay + promotion replay ( 1), Normal Replay + Promotion Replay (2), Normal Replay + Promotion Replay (3), Strawberry (1) + Strawberry (2), Melon, Nine (1), Nine (2), Nine (3), 9-piece combination (4), 9-piece combination (5), 9-piece combination (6), 9-piece combination (7), 9-piece combination (8), 9-piece combination (9) in order It is comprised so that it may be read as. Note that “+” is written between winning combinations to indicate that the winning combination is read out simultaneously in the internal lottery. For example, in the case of “normal replay + falling replay”, it indicates that in the internal lottery, the normal replay and the falling replay are simultaneously read out as the lottery target combination.

  When the set value is 1, when “80” is the regular bonus when the target of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and “80” is the big bonus (2) When “100” is normal replay, “7281” is normal replay + falling replay, “1820” is normal replay + falling replay + BAR replay, and “0” is normal replay + promotion. “0” when replay (1), “0” when normal replay + promotion replay (2), “0” when normal replay + promotion replay (3), strawberry (1 ) + Strawberry (2), "700", when it is melon, "7000" is one of the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9), "1000" is the number of judgment values Get asFIG. 7A also shows the number of determination values of each lottery object combination acquired in the internal lottery when the set value is 2 to 4.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the larger the value set as the set value, the larger the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery for the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus. Yes. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special combination in the internal lottery.

  FIGS. 7B to 7E show when the game state is the preparation mode, RT1, RT2, internal RT, and normal replay, normal replay + fall replay, normal replay + fall replay in the internal lottery. + BAR replay, normal replay + promotion replay (1), normal replay + promotion replay (2), normal replay + promotion replay (3) showing the number of determination values acquired when each of them is read as a lottery target role It is.

  When the game state is the preparation mode, RT1, RT2, internal RT, normal replay, normal replay + fall replay, normal replay + fall replay + BAR replay, normal replay + promotion replay (1), normal replay + promotion The number of determination values acquired in each of the replay (2), normal replay + promotion replay (3) other than the lottery is the same as the number of determination values shown in FIG. That is, the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the game state is the preparation mode, RT1, RT2, or internal medium RT is the normal replay, normal replay + falling shown in FIG. Replay, normal replay + fall replay + BAR replay, normal replay + promotion replay (1), normal replay + promotion replay (2), normal replay + promotion replay (3) Normal replay, normal replay + fall replay, normal replay + fall replay + BAR replay, normal replay + promotion replay (1), normal replay + promotion replay (2), normal replay + promotion replay shown in 7 (b) to (d) (3) It is replaced with the number of judgment values acquired in each internal lottery.

  In addition, when the internal RT is already set, any bonus winning flag such as big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, etc. has already been set. Even in such a case, the already set bonus winning flag is maintained, and the winning bonus winning flag is not reset or updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bonus from being drawn and won again in the internal RT that has already won the bonus.

  FIG. 7B shows a case where the game state is a preparation mode controlled after the bonus is over, and is acquired in the internal lottery of each of the normal replay, the fall replay, the BAR replay, and the promoted replay (1) to (3). FIG. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4 and the target role of the internal lottery is normal replay, “9101” is normal replay + fall replay, normal replay + fall replay + BAR replay, normal replay + promotion replay ( 1) “0” is acquired as the number of determination values when each of normal replay + promotion replay (2) and normal replay + promotion replay (3). Thus, in the preparation mode, the number of determination values is set so as not to win the fall replay and the promotion replay.

  FIG. 7 (c) shows a case where the special game is stopped when the game state is the preparation mode or RT2, or when RT1 is controlled by digesting 32 games in the normal game state, and the normal replay is performed. It is a figure which shows the number of judgment values acquired in each internal lottery of fall replay, BAR replay, and promotion replay (1)-(3). For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “13942” is “normal replay + fall replay” and “6553” is normal replay + fall replay + BAR when the target of the internal lottery is normal replay. “6553” when replaying, “3120” when normal replay + promotion replay (1), “3120” when normal replay + promotion replay (2), normal replay + promotion replay ( In the case of 3), “3120” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  Therefore, the winning rate of normal replay in RT1 is (13942 + 6553 + 6553 + 3120 + 3120 + 3120) /65536≈1/1.8. Further, the winning rate of the fall replay is (6553 + 6553) / 65536≈1 / 5. The winning rate of promotion replay is (3120 + 3120 + 3120) / 65536≈1 / 7. In RT1, the number of determination values is set so that the player can win both the promotion replay and the fall replay.

  FIG. 7D shows a case where RT2 is controlled by winning a promotion replay when the gaming state is RT1, and a normal replay, a fall replay, a BAR replay, and a promotion replay (1) to (3). ) It is a figure showing the number of judgment values acquired in each internal lottery. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4 and the target role of the internal lottery is normal replay, “50412” is normal replay + fall replay, normal replay + fall replay + BAR replay, normal replay + promotion replay ( 1) “0” is acquired as the number of determination values when each of normal replay + promotion replay (2) and normal replay + promotion replay (3).

  Therefore, the winning rate for normal replay in RT2 is 50412 / 65536≈1 / 1.3. In RT2, the number of determination values is set so as not to win the fall replay and the promotion replay.

  FIG. 7 (e) shows a case where the gaming state is an internal medium RT controlled from when the bonus is won internally until winning, and normal replay, falling replay, BAR replay, promotion replay (1) to (3) ) It is a figure showing the number of judgment values acquired in each internal lottery. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “10000” is “normal replay + fall replay” when the target of the internal lottery is normal replay, and “5000” is normal replay + fall replay + BAR. When replaying, “5000” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  FIG. 7F is a diagram showing the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is a bonus. When the gaming state is a bonus, the lottery target roles are all nine (1) to (9) (all nine types (1) to (9)), strawberry (1), strawberry (1 ) + Strawberry (2), Melon, Nine (1), Nine (2), Nine (3), Nine (4), Nine (5), Nine (6) , 9-piece combination (7), 9-piece combination (8), and 9-piece combination (9) are sequentially read as lottery targets.

  Then, when the set value is 1, “55935” when the target combination of the internal lottery is all nine (1) to (9) and “200” when the combination is strawberry (1), (1) + “strawberry” (2), “100” is determined, “3000” is determined, and “700” is determined when any of the nine roles (1) to (9) is selected. Get as number of values. FIG. 7 (f) also shows the number of determination values for each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the set value is 2 to 4. From the number of determination values shown in FIG. 7 (f), when the gaming state is bonus, all nine winning combinations (1) to (9) are won with high probability.

Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.
The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of frames to be drawn according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the stop status of the reels and the stop position of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of frames to be pulled in at each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) per reel are defined, and these areas are set to 0 to 20 (see FIG. 3) is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (in this embodiment, a perspective window). 3 when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected at the timing (the timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps). This is a table in which the number of frames is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stop control table for the unreacted reel corresponding to the stop reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. .

  If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. Thereby, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 The lower symbol area).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the winning combination is drawn not to be aligned on the winning line. Create a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn in and perform reel stop control. If none of the roles are won, stop control with a number of frames to be drawn that does not match any of the roles A table is created and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If the winning combination is not drawn, it will be controlled so that it can be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  If a special role has been carried over from before the previous game and a small role (such as strawberry (1), melon, 9-card role (1)) is won, etc., the winning small role will be 4 frames on the winning line. The number of draws is determined so that the maximum number of draws can be drawn in the range, and for the stop operation position where the selected small role cannot be drawn into the winning line in the range of up to 4 frames, the selected special role is 4 in the winning line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the maximum number of frames can be drawn in the range of frames is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, Control is performed to align and stop them, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within the 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the normal small combination cannot be drawn. As a result, after winning a small role and then winning a special role, the special role is won, and compared to the case where the special role is preferentially won, Since the special combination can be won, the player's medal can be increased as much as possible before the special combination is won, and reel control advantageous to the player is performed.

  For example, when a special combination and a melon with a payout number of more than 3 are selected, reel control is performed preferentially, which is a 6-plus increase by winning a special combination before winning the special combination, which is advantageous to the player. . When a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the small combination.

  In the reel control, an example is described in which reel control is performed in which a small role is preferentially aligned on a winning line over a special role. However, not all small roles are preferentially aligned over a special role. A small role in which medals greater than or equal to the number of wagers are paid out (in the case of 3 bets, a small role in which 3 or more medals are paid out, for example, a melon that pays out 9 medals by winning, 9), etc. (hereinafter also referred to as a normal small combination), the reel control is preferentially arranged, and a small combination in which medals less than the bet number are paid out (when the bet number is 3, small medals less than 3 are paid out) For a combination, for example, when a single combination that pays out one medal by winning is set as a winning combination, the special combination is given priority on the winning line. It may be configured to perform the reel control to align. Thereby, even if winning is made, it is possible to prevent the reel control from being preferentially aligned even for the small role that is disadvantageous for the player because the payout is less than the bet amount.

  Next, when a special role and a replaying role are won at the same time (such as a big bonus (1) + normal replay), such as when a replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over before the previous game Creates a stop control table in which the number of drawn-in frames is determined so that the selected re-gamer is drawn into the winning line within a range of 4 frames, and performs reel stop control. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When multiple types of re-game players are simultaneously elected, and the winning role includes a fall replay, as shown in FIG. Replays determined according to whether the operated reel (the first stopped reel) is the left reel, middle reel, or right reel is aligned on the winning line with a maximum of 4 frames. Control to stop. FIG. 8A is a diagram for explaining the reel control when winning the fall replay.

  For example, when the normal replay + falling replay is won and the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the combination of the falling replays among the selected replaying players is controlled to be aligned with any winning line. As shown in FIG. 3, symbols constituting the fall replay are arranged at intervals of 7 frames or less on each reel, and L1 to L6 are set as the winning lines, so that the normal replay + fall fall replay is won. When the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time in this case, the reel control is performed so that the falling replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  On the other hand, when the normal replay + falling replay is won and the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, the combination of the normal replays among the selected replay players is aligned on any winning line and stopped. To control. As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the normal replay are arranged at intervals of 7 frames or less on each reel, and L1 to L6 are set as the winning lines, so that the normal replay + falling replay is won. When the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, the reel control is performed so that the normal replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. .

  In addition, when normal replay + falling replay + BAR replay is won and the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, the combination of the falling replays among the selected replaying players is aligned with any winning line. Control to stop. For this reason, if the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time when the normal replay + falling replay + BAR replay is won, the fall falls regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. Reel control is performed so that the replay always wins.

  On the other hand, when the normal replay + falling replay + BAR replay is won and the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the combination of the normal replays among the selected replay players is stopped on any winning line. To do. Therefore, when the right reel 2R is first stopped when the normal replay + falling replay + BAR replay is won, the normal replay is always won regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. Thus, the reel control is performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first stop reel for avoiding the falling replay winning and the normal replay winning depending on whether the normal replay + falling replay is won or whether the normal replay + falling replay + BAR replay is won. The operating procedure (avoidance procedure) can be made different by making it different.

  Further, when the fall replay is won when the production state is not AT, the type of replay won at the same time as the fall replay cannot be specified. For this reason, the normal replay winning is avoided by avoiding the falling replay winning with a probability of 1/2, but the falling replay is won with the remaining 1/2 probability.

  On the other hand, when the fall state replay is won when the production state is AT, the type of replay won at the same time as the fall replay can be specified. Therefore, as long as the operation is not mistaken, the first stop can be made so as to always avoid the fall replay winning and to make the normal replay winning.

  As described above, the winning rate of the fall replay per game during RT1 is 1/5. Therefore, when the reel control is considered, the winning rate of the fall replay is 1/10.

  In the case where a plurality of types of re-playing players are simultaneously elected and when the winning combination includes a promotion replay, the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2L have the same configuration pattern in the normal replay and the promotion replay. The reel control is performed so that the “banana” symbol is drawn and stopped on the winning line, and the composition symbol of the promotion replay selected among “BAR”, “Red 7”, and “White 7” on the right reel 2R is displayed on the winning line. In order to stop at a maximum of 4 frames, and if it is impossible to draw the promoted replay components on the winning line, the reel will be drawn to stop the normal replay “banana” on the winning line. Be controlled.

  As a result, when the normal replay and any one of the promoted replays (1) to (3) are won at the same time, the configuration symbols on the right reel 2R of the selected promoted replay can be drawn onto the winning line. When the stop switch 8R is operated, the winning promotion replay is won, and when the stop switch 8R is operated at a timing at which it is impossible to draw the constituent symbols in the right reel 2R of the winning promotion replay onto the winning line. The reel is controlled to win the normal replay that is won simultaneously.

  Further, when the promotion replay is won when the production state is not AT, the type of the promoted replay that has been won cannot be specified. For this reason, as described above, the promotion replay won with a probability of 1/3 is won and controlled by RT2, and the promotion replay won with a probability of 2/3 is missed and the promotion to RT2 is lost. .

  On the other hand, when the promotion replay is won when the production state is AT, the type of the promoted replay that has been won can be specified. Therefore, as long as the operation timing is not mistaken, it is possible to make a promotion replay prize and to promote to RT2.

  As described above, the total of the winning percentages for winning one of the promoted replays (1) to (3) per game during RT1 is 1/7. The replay winning rate is 1/7 × 1/3 = 1/21.

  Here, when the winning rate of the fall replay and the winning rate of the promotion replay are compared with each other during RT1, the winning rate of the fall replay is set to be higher than the winning rate of the promotion replay. Therefore, when it is RT1 and non-AT, the possibility of winning the fall replay before the promoted replay increases, so that it can be easily controlled to the normal gaming state and difficult to be controlled by RT2.

  Even when RT1 is non-AT and a promotion replay is won and control is performed by RT2, it is controlled to RT1 again by losing the nine-card combination when winning nine combinations. In addition, in a state where the winning combination cannot be identified, as described above, the winning combination cannot be drawn with a probability of 8/9 and cannot win. Therefore, since the possibility of stopping the special outcome is increased even when it is RT2 and non-AT, it can be easily controlled by RT1 and can be made difficult to control continuously by RT2.

  On the other hand, in the case of ART, it is possible to grasp the internal winning situation and intentionally avoid the fall replay winning, so it is possible to avoid being controlled to the normal gaming state, and by winning the promotion replay As a result, RT2 can be controlled. Further, when it is RT2 and AT, it is possible to identify the type of the winning nine-piece combination, and it is possible to intentionally win the nine-piece combination, so that RT2 can be easily continued.

  That is, when the performance state in RT1 is not controlled by AT, it is difficult to control by RT2 by making it easy to control to the normal gaming state, and when controlled by AT, RT2 is surely controlled and the RT2 is controlled. It can be made easy to continue. For this reason, the difference in the degree of advantage for the player can be increased depending on whether or not the performance state in RT1 or RT2 is controlled by the AT, so that a sense of expectation that the performance state is controlled by the AT can be increased. Can be improved effectively, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When multiple types of small roles are won at the same time (strawberry (1) + strawberry (2), all nine roles (1) to (9), etc.), the winning line will be displayed according to the timing of the stop operation. In addition, the symbols that make up the winning small combination that can be pulled in within the maximum four-frame drawing range are aligned and stopped. When all 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) are won, any one of the combinations of 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) shown in FIG. Reel control is performed to win a prize. When winning strawberry (1) + strawberry (2), either one of the symbol combinations of strawberry (1) and strawberry (2) shown in FIG. 5 will be awarded regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Reel control is performed.

  In this embodiment, when winning a strawberry, reel control is performed to draw the symbols constituting the winning strawberry for the left reel 2L on the winning line in a drawing range of up to 4 frames, and a special reel is used for the middle reel 2C. Reel control is performed. FIG. 8B is a diagram for explaining the special reel control of the middle reel 2C when winning a strawberry.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), symbol number 5 is provided on condition that at least strawberry (1) is won (strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) winning or strawberry (1) alone winning). Special reel control is performed to draw the “Deca (1) (upper half of the star without slashes)” to the middle in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. In addition, on the condition that strawberry (2) is selected (strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) selected), the symbol “Deca (2) (the lower half of the star without diagonal lines)” of symbol number 4 Special reel control is performed to pull in the middle stage with a maximum of 4 frames. When winning the strawberry (2), if the symbol number 4 and the symbol number 5 can be drawn to the middle in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the symbol number 4 symbol Special reel control is performed in which the number 5 symbol is given priority over the middle stage. When the strawberry is not won, the reel control for stopping the symbols other than the symbols of symbols 4 and 5 on the middle reel 2C in the middle, except for the case where the reel control for generating another winning combination is performed. Done.

  For this reason, when the stop operation is performed so as to stop the middle reel 2L at the timing when the symbol of symbol number 4 is stopped in the middle row, the symbol of symbol number 4 stops in the middle row and other than strawberry (1) and strawberry (2) The player can recognize that the strawberry (2) has been won when the winning of the role of is not generated, the symbol of the symbol number 5 stops in the middle, and the strawberry (1) and strawberry (2 ) When the winning of a role other than) has not occurred, the player can recognize that at least strawberry (1) has been won, and when the other symbols are stopped in the middle row, the strawberry is won. It is possible to make the player recognize that it was not.

  Note that when the strawberry (1) or strawberry (2) is won during the bonus, the notification promotion condition is established. For this reason, in the middle reel 2C, the fact that the symbol number 4 or 5 is stopped in the middle stage and the winning of the role other than the strawberry (1) and the strawberry (2) does not occur is informed that the notification promotion condition is established. can do.

  In addition, when a strawberry (1) or strawberry (2) is won other than the bonus, an AT lottery is performed. In addition, when the strawberry (1) or the strawberry (2) is won in the high probability state, points are awarded. For this reason, in the middle reel 2C, the symbol number 4 or 5 is stopped in the middle stage, and winning of a role other than strawberry (1) and strawberry (2) does not occur, thereby improving the sense of expectation for AT. it can.

  Next, processing executed by the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 1, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game process one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must be in a state where the game can be progressed first. In order to be able to advance the game, for example, the set value work is stored in the set value work with the set value in the normal range with the main control unit 41 including the main CPU 41a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 41c. The condition is that there is no abnormality. When the game is ready to proceed, game processing is repeated in the slot machine 1 game by game. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 1 will be described. The “game” in the slot machine 1 is, in a narrow sense, a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  The game control process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or immediately after the setting is changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. When processing of one game is started, first, the number of bets is set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4, and operating the start switch 7. A BET process for instructing the substantial start of the game is performed. If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same number of bets as in the previous game (3 in this embodiment) is automatically set by the flag during the replay game (the flag during the replay game is deleted at this stage) ). In the BET process, every time a bet number is set, a BET command that can specify the number of medals used for setting the bet number is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  When the number of bets is set by BET processing and the start switch 7 is operated, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and winnings for each combination determined according to the gaming state are allowed based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to do so. In the lottery process, an internal winning command indicating the setting status of the winning flag set in the RAM 41c according to the lottery result is transmitted to the effect control board 90. Further, in the lottery process, when one of the big bonuses (1), (2), and the regular bonus is won, a process for controlling the internal medium RT (for example, the value of the game state flag is set to the value of the internal medium RT flag). Set value etc.).

  When the lottery process ends, the reel rotation process is performed next. In the reel rotation process, the reel motor is operated on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game. 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When a predetermined condition (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 33SL, 33SC, 33SR after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) is established from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R Is enabled. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. In the reel rotation process, a reel rotation command for notifying the start of reel rotation is transmitted to the effect control board 90 when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, and rotation of any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. Each time, a reel stop command capable of specifying the area number of the corresponding stop operation position of the corresponding reel is transmitted to the effect control board 90 to determine which reel has been stopped.

  When the driving of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a winning determination process for determining whether or not any of the symbols shown in FIG. 5A is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping. Is done. If it is determined in this winning determination process that any combination has been won, various processes corresponding to the winnings generated on the game control board 40 are performed. In the winning determination process, after the winning determination is made, a winning determination command capable of specifying the presence / absence of the winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out is sent to the effect control board 90. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that one of the big bonuses (1), (2), or the regular bonus is won, a process for controlling the corresponding bonus (for example, the value of the game state flag is set). The corresponding bonus value is set).

  Also, in the winning determination process, when it is determined that the player has won the fall replay during RT1, the process for controlling the normal gaming state (for example, setting the value of the normal gaming state to the value of the gaming state flag) ) Is performed. Also, when it is determined that the promotion replay has been won during RT1, processing for controlling to RT2 (for example, setting the value of RT2 as the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. Further, when it is determined that no winning has occurred in the preparation mode or RT2 and the special outcome is stopped at any of the winning lines L1 to L6, the control is made to RT1. Processing (for example, setting the value of RT1 as the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, nine winning combinations (1) to (9) that trigger special special event suspension are read out independently as other lottery winning combinations without being read out as the lottery target combination, and the internal winning combination is made. Is done. For this reason, when the special game stops, no winnings can occur. However, the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) that trigger the special event stop may be read out as a lottery target combination at the same time as other winning combinations, and an internal winning may be performed. In this case, there is a possibility that another winning combination won at the same time may occur even when the special event stops. If the special event is stopped and a winning of another winning combination occurs, a profit associated with the occurrence of the winning of the other winning combination is granted, and the special event is further stopped in the preparation mode or RT2. May be controlled to RT1.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed. In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out an excess number of medals from the medal payout opening 9. Also, in the payout process, when the payout of medals is started by payout of winnings or credits (including medals used for setting the number of bets), a payout start command for notifying the start of payout of medals is sent to the effect control board 90 When the medal payout by winning and winning the credit is completed, a payout end command for notifying the end of the medal payout is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  Also, in the payout process, as various processes not related to winning, a bonus end determination process for determining whether or not a bonus end condition corresponding to the bonus is satisfied during the bonus, 32 games are consumed in the normal gaming state. Thus, a normal game state end determination process is performed to determine whether or not the normal game state end condition is satisfied.

  In the bonus end determination process, when it is determined that the bonus end condition is satisfied, a process for controlling to the preparation mode (for example, setting the value of the preparation mode flag to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. Further, in the normal game state end determination process, when it is determined that the normal game state end condition is satisfied, a process for controlling to RT1 (for example, setting the value of the RT1 flag to the value of the game state flag) is performed. It is.

  In the payout process, the game state of the next game (whether in the normal game state, in the preparation mode, in RT1, in RT2, in the big bonus, or in the regular bonus) Etc.) is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  Also, in the payout process, a winning flag that does not carry over (e.g., a winning flag for a small role or a replaying player) is deleted, and a winning flag for a big bonus or a regular bonus stored in a special work is not deleted. As a result, the winning flags for the big bonus and the regular bonus are carried over to the next game until the winning bonus is won. At the end of the payout process, that is, at the end of one game, a game state command indicating the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 90. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 shifts the game state among the preparation mode, RT1, RT2, normal game state, internal RT, and bonus. A command is transmitted to the effect control board 90 according to the progress status. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 performs various processes based on the command received from the game control board 40.

  Next, processing executed by the sub control unit 91 will be described. The sub-control unit 91 first executes a predetermined effect initial setting process, and after performing an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 to the state when the power supply is stopped, the effect-side random value Repeat the update process.

  In the sub-control unit 91, an interrupt for controlling the progress of the effect is generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the timer interrupt flag of the RAM 91c is set to the ON state by the reset / interrupt controller. Then, the effect control interruption process is executed. In the effect control interrupt process, the contents of the internal register are saved, the effect backup process is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, the data required for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up. Is done. Further, command analysis processing for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 is executed, and predetermined effect control processing is executed. By this effect control process, various game effects are performed by displaying images on the liquid crystal display 51 and generating sounds from the speakers 53 and 54 according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1.

  The game effects include a game condition effect according to the game state, a high probability state, a point giving effect for notifying that a point has been awarded in the bonus, and a navigation effect executed when the effect state is controlled by the AT. In addition, an expectation effect that makes the player have a sense of expectation for winning the bonus or executing the AT lottery is included. It should be noted that image element data and moving image data for performing a game effect are stored in a predetermined ROM.

  In order to perform a game effect, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 has various counters, areas for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, and an internal winning command. The area for storing the winning status, the combination of the display results derived to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the information indicating whether or not a winning has occurred, and the gaming state applied in the game running on the gaming control board 40 side (The winning situation and the game state are twice) are also provided in the RAM 91c.

  Further, in the effect control board 90, a stop symbol table for determining the display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 91c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone. For this reason, the ROM 91b stores in advance a table showing all symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. With reference to this table, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped on the stop symbol table. The symbol is registered. The sub-control unit 91 produces an effect based on the registration information of the stop symbol table.

  In addition, various random values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the side of the effect control board 90, and then the contents of the saved register are restored, and then the effect control interrupt process ends.

  In the effect control process executed in the effect control interrupt process described above, the sub-control unit 91 assigns / manages the probability state control process for controlling the probability state as shown in FIG. A point related process for notification, an AT control process for controlling the effect state to the AT according to the game state, and a game effect execution process for executing the game effect according to the game state and the like are performed.

  The sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs a game state effect execution process included in the game effect execution process, thereby providing a game state effect related to the current game state and the effect state on the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect. This is performed using electrical components such as the LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55.

  As the game state effect, for example, in the normal game state and the preparation mode, a normal effect (for example, a message such as “Normally!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51) that can specify that it is non-AT is performed. It is. In addition, the above-described normal performance is also performed during RT1, RT2, and internal medium RT when non-AT is being performed (when the AT flag is not set). For this reason, when it is non-AT, a common gaming state effect is executed in the gaming state other than the bonus. As a result, it is difficult to specify which gaming state is controlled from the gaming state effect.

  Further, when it is AT (when the AT flag is set), when RT1, RT2, or internal RT, it is possible to specify that the AT is in progress (for example, the liquid crystal display 51 has “ A message such as “ART in progress!” Is displayed. As described above, in the case of AT, a common gaming state effect is executed in any of RT1, RT2, and internal RT. As a result, although it is possible to specify whether or not the AT is in progress from the gaming state effect, it is difficult to specify from the gaming state effect whether RT1, RT2, or internal RT is controlled. In addition, during the bonus, a predetermined bonus effect that can identify the bonus is performed.

  Next, AT lottery will be described. The sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs the first AT lottery by executing the first AT lottery process included in the AT control process. In the first AT lottery process, when it is determined that a strawberry or bonus has been won based on the internal winning command from the main control unit 41, the probability according to the total number of points actually given after the previous first AT lottery is determined. Therefore, the first AT lottery is executed. Strawberries and bonuses are also referred to as lottery triggers because they trigger the first AT lottery.

  Further, in the first AT lottery process, when it is determined that the bonus is ended based on the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, the first AT lottery is executed according to the probability corresponding to the total number of points given in the bonus. Is done.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining lottery conditions that trigger the execution of the first AT lottery. FIGS. 10 and 11 are diagrams for explaining tables referred to in the first AT lottery.

  In the first AT lottery, as shown in FIG. 9, when it is determined that the lottery opportunity combination is won, the lottery opportunity combination winning table shown in FIG. 10 is referred to, and when it is determined that the bonus has ended, it is shown in FIG. With reference to the bonus end time table, the number of navigation stocks is determined according to the probability corresponding to the total number of points awarded. Whether or not a strawberry win or a bonus win is determined by an internal winning command from the main control unit 41, for example. Further, whether or not the bonus has ended is specified from a gaming state command from the main control unit 41, for example.

  The number of navigation stocks indicates a period during which the AT can be controlled. By consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stock by 1, the game is controlled by the AT while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50), and the navigation effect can be executed during that time. Accordingly, it can be said that the greater the determined number of navigation stocks, the higher the degree of advantage for the player because the AT is controlled over a longer period.

  In the present embodiment, the AT is controlled according to the total number of navigation stocks already held, the number of navigation stocks determined in the first AT lottery, and the number of navigation stocks determined in the second AT lottery. Is done. The total number of navigation stocks is specified by the navigation stock number information. The navigation stock number information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and is updated according to the AT lottery result and the control to the AT in the AT control process. That is, the sub-control unit 91 performs processing for adding and updating the navigation stock number information when the navigation stock number is acquired by AT lottery, and performing processing for subtracting 1 from the navigation stock when starting AT. Do. The sub-control unit 91 controls the AT when the number of navigation stocks specified from the navigation stock number information in the RAM 91c is 1 or more during non-AT and a predetermined AT activation timing described later is reached at RT.

  In the first AT lottery, the case where the lottery opportunity winning table shown in FIG. 10 is referred will be described. The lottery opportunity combination winning table in the present embodiment has a plurality of ratios for acquiring the navigation stock and the ratio for acquiring a larger number of navigation stocks depending on the gaming state when the lottery opportunity combination is won. Types are provided.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram for explaining a lottery opportunity combination winning table that is referred to when a lottery opportunity combination is won in the preparation mode or the normal gaming state. The total number of granted points that have been awarded in addition to the bonus and that have been granted since the last 1st AT lottery until the current lottery win (hereinafter also referred to as the total number of normal granted points) is “0 to 2”. When it is, the number of Navistock is determined to be 0 at a rate of 80%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 1 at a rate of 10%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 3 at a rate of 5%, and the rate is 2% The first AT lottery at the time of the lottery campaign will be decided so that the number of Navistock will be determined as 5, the number of Navistock will be determined as 10 at the rate of 2%, and the number of Navistock will be determined as 20 at the rate of 1% Is done. As will be described later, the upper limit of the total number of normal granted points is set to “10”. In addition, the total number of points awarded includes points awarded by winning the strawberry when the lottery trigger is a strawberry.

  Note that the expected value of the number of navigation stocks may be an average value of the number of navigation stocks to be acquired, and the number of navigation stocks D1, D2, D3,... That can be acquired (for example, navigation in FIG. 1, 3, 5, 10, 20) are set as the number of stocks, and the grant rates P1, P2, P3... (For example, the winning rate in FIG. 10) are set for each point amount. , D1 × P1 + D2 × P2 + D3 × P3 +... For example, when the total number of normal granted points shown in FIG. 10A is “0 to 2”, the expected value of the number of navigation stocks is 1 × 0.1 + 3 × 0.05 + 5 × 0.02 + 10 × 0.02 + 20 × 0. It can be said that .01 = 0.75 is set.

  When the total number of granted points is “3-5”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 30%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, and the number of navigation stocks is a rate of 20%. Is determined to be 3, the number of Navistock is determined to be 5 at a rate of 15%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 10 at a rate of 3%, and the number of Navistock is determined to be 20 at a rate of 2% The first AT lottery at the time of winning the lottery opportunity is performed.

  When the total number of granted points is “6-9”, the number of navigation stocks is determined as 1 at 42%, the number of navigation stocks is determined as 3 at 30%, and the number of navigation stocks as 20%. 5 is determined, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at a rate of 5%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at a rate of 3%.

  When the total number of granted points is “10”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 40%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 30%, and the number of navigation stocks is 10 at a rate of 15%. The first AT lottery at the time of winning the lottery opportunity is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at a rate of 15%.

  FIG. 10B is a diagram for explaining a lottery opportunity combination winning table that is referred to when a lottery opportunity combination is won in RT1. When the total number of granted points is “0-2”, the navigation stock number is determined to be 0 at 85%, the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at 7%, and the navigation stock number is at 4%. 3 is determined, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at a rate of 1%.

  When the total number of granted points is “3-5”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 40%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 35%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 20%. 3 is determined, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at a rate of 2%.

  When the total number of granted points is “6-9”, the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at 55%, the navigation stock number is determined to be 3 at 25%, and the navigation stock number is at 15%. 5 is determined, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at a rate of 2%.

  When the total number of granted points is “10”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 60%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 15%, and the number of navigation stocks is 10 at a rate of 13%. The first AT lottery at the time of winning the lottery opportunity is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at a rate of 12%.

  FIG. 10C is a diagram for explaining a lottery opportunity combination winning table that is referred to when a lottery opportunity combination is won in RT2. When the total number of granted points is “0-2”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 90%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 5%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 2% 3 is determined, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 2%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at a rate of 1%.

  When the total number of granted points is “3-5”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 50%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 15%. 3 is determined, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at a rate of 2%.

  When the total number of granted points is “6-9”, the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at 70%, the navigation stock number is determined to be 3 at 20%, and the navigation stock number is at 5%. 5 is determined, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at a rate of 2%.

  When the total number of granted points is “10”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 70%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 10%, and the number of navigation stocks is 10 at a rate of 10%. The first AT lottery at the time of the lottery opportunity winning is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at a rate of 10%.

  As described above, in the lottery opportunity winning table shown in each of FIGS. 10A to 10C, the larger the total number of granted points, the higher the number of navigation stocks that is 1 or more and the higher the number of navigation stocks. In other words, the winning rate is set so that the AT lottery at the time of the lottery opportunity combination is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by increasing the expected value of the number of navigation stocks. Further, when the total number of granted points is 6 or more, the number of navigation stock is always determined to be 1 or more.

  Therefore, as the total number of granted points increases, the AT is controlled at a higher rate and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be higher at a higher rate. It can be said that the AT lottery will be performed. As a result, the greater the total number of points recognized by the player, the greater the sense of expectation that AT will be controlled and the acquisition of a larger number of navigation stocks, and the interest of the game will be improved. it can.

  In addition, as the lottery target winning table, when the table shown in FIG. 10B is referred to, the table shown in FIG. 10B is 1 or more at a higher rate than when the table shown in FIG. In addition, the winning rate is set so that the number of navigation stocks is larger. In addition, as the lottery target winning table, when the table shown in FIG. 10 (a) is referred to, it is 1 or more at a higher rate than when the table shown in FIG. 10 (b) is referenced. In addition, the winning rate is set so that the number of navigation stocks is larger. Therefore, when the game state when winning the lottery opportunity is in the preparation mode or the normal game state, the AT lottery will be the most advantageous for the player so that the expected value of the number of navigation stock is maximized AT lottery so that the expected value of the number of navigation stock is larger when RT1 is more than RT2 among the game modes other than the preparation mode and the normal game state. Can be said to be performed. As a result, whether the gaming state when winning the lottery trigger is the preparation mode, the normal gaming state, or the RT1 when the AT is controlled and the expectation for acquiring a larger number of navigation stocks is won Or it can be different depending on whether it is RT2, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the order of the gaming state in which the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player is not limited to this, and any order may be used. For example, when the game state at the time of winning the lottery opportunity is RT2, the AT lottery is performed so that the expected value of the number of navigation stocks is maximized and the player is most advantageous, and further RT1 The AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player by increasing the expected value of the number of navigation stocks when the game is in the preparation mode or in the normal gaming state. Good.

  Next, the case where the bonus end time table shown in FIG. 11 is referred to in the first AT lottery will be described. If the total number of points granted during the bonus and the total number of points granted at the end of the bonus (hereinafter also referred to as the total number of bonus points granted) is “0 to 1”, the navigation stock has a ratio of 95%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the number is determined to be 0, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 2%.

  When the total number of bonus points awarded is “2-3”, the navigation stock number is determined to be 0 at a rate of 80%, the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at a rate of 15%, and the navigation stock is a rate of 4%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the number is determined to be 3 and the navigation stock number is determined to be 5 at a rate of 1%.

  When the total number of bonus points granted is “4”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 60%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 25%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined at a rate of 10%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 5 at a rate of 4%, and the navigation stock number is determined to be 10 at a rate of 1%.

  When the total number of bonus points given is “5”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 70%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 10%, and the number of navigation stocks is increased at a rate of 10%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 20 at a rate of 10%. As will be described later, the upper limit of the total number of bonus points granted is set to “5”.

  As described above, in the bonus end table of FIG. 11, the larger the total number of bonus points granted, the higher the percentage of navigation stock that is determined to be 1 or more, that is, the more advantageous for the player. Thus, the first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed. Further, when the total number of bonus points awarded is 5, the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 3 or more. For this reason, when the total number of bonus points awarded is 5, the AT is always controlled after the bonus is over.

  Therefore, it can be said that the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by controlling the AT at a higher rate and determining the higher number of navigation stocks at a higher rate as the total number of bonus points granted increases. . As a result, the greater the total number of points recognized by the player, the greater the sense of expectation that AT will be controlled and the acquisition of a larger number of navigation stocks, and the interest of the game will be improved. it can. Further, even if the total number of points recognized by the player is small, the points are notified by performing a notification lottery as will be described later, so points that are greater than the total number of recognized points are actually given. There is a possibility that the expectation to be controlled by the AT and to obtain a larger number of navigation stocks can be sustained.

  As for the bonus end time table, similar to the lottery opportunity winning time table, there are provided a plurality of types of tables with different ratios controlled by AT and determined by a larger number of navigation stocks for each gaming state. May be. In this case, the first AT lottery at the end of the bonus may be performed with reference to a table corresponding to the gaming state when the completed bonus is won. Thereby, the expectation for being controlled by the AT and acquiring a larger number of navigation stocks can be varied depending on the gaming state when the bonus is won, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. 10 or FIG. 11 by the first AT lottery process performed when the bonus is won or the bonus is ended by the sub-control unit 91. Done.

  The points related to the probability determined to be controlled by the AT in the first AT lottery are given and managed by the sub-control unit 91 by executing the point related processing included in the effect control processing. Further, the point-related processing is executed by the sub-control unit 91, whereby the above-described point giving effect is executed. FIG. 12 is a flowchart for explaining point-related processing executed by the sub-control unit 91.

  First, in S1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined point grant condition is satisfied. FIG. 13A is a diagram for explaining a point granting condition that can be established when the probability state is other than the bonus and the probability state is a high probability state, and FIG. 13B is a point that can be established during the bonus. It is a figure for demonstrating provision conditions.

  First, referring to FIG. 13A, when the player is in a state other than a bonus and in a high probability state, it is established on condition that a melon winning or a strawberry winning is made. More specifically, when a melon is won in a state other than a bonus and in a high probability state, the point granting condition is satisfied on the condition that, for example, a predetermined lottery using a random number extracted from a random counter is won. . For example, the probability of winning in the predetermined lottery is set to 25% when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and is set to 50% when the gaming state is other than the normal gaming state. That is, even when the melon is won in the high probability state, the point granting condition is established at a higher rate when the game state is other than the normal game state than when the game state is the normal game state. Therefore, it can be said that the player is more advantageous when the player is in the preparation mode or RT, for example, than in the normal gaming state, in that the point granting condition is easily established.

  As will be described later, points that are awarded when the point granting condition is established by winning a melon when it is other than a bonus and in a high probability state can be notified according to the result of a predetermined notification lottery.

  In addition, when a strawberry is won in a high probability state other than the bonus, the point granting condition is always satisfied. For this reason, at least a predetermined number (for example, 1) of points has been awarded for points given when a strawberry is won and the point granting condition is satisfied when a high probability state other than a bonus is established, as will be described later. Will be informed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 13 (b), during the bonus, it is established on condition that a melon is won, or that nine winning combinations are won and won. More specifically, when a melon is won while a bonus is being awarded, for example, a point granting condition is established on the condition that the player wins by a predetermined lottery using a random number extracted from a random counter. The probability of winning in the predetermined lottery is set to 50%, for example.

  In addition, as will be described later, the points awarded when the point granting condition is established by winning a melon during the bonus can be notified according to the result of a predetermined notification lottery.

  In addition, when a bonus is being awarded, a point granting condition is always satisfied when a winning combination is won for nine winning combinations. As described later, at least a predetermined number (for example, 1) of points will be awarded for points awarded when a bonus is awarded and a point granting condition is established when a winning combination is awarded to nine winning combinations. You will be notified.

  In the present embodiment, when a bonus is being awarded, information that can specify that one of the nine winning combinations has been won is notified (for example, “9 winning combinations”). May be displayed). " Thereby, in the game in which the information is notified during the bonus, it is possible to add an interest such as predicting which 9 winning combinations the player has won.

  In addition, when the point granting condition is always satisfied by winning, it is not limited to notifying that a predetermined number of points have been granted, but accurately notifying the granted points determined in S2, which will be described later. May be.

  Returning to FIG. 12, if it is not determined in S1 that the point granting condition according to the state shown in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1 that the point granting condition is satisfied, in S2, a grant point that can be given to the player is set.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a table for determining the grant points in S2. When the point granting condition is established when the bonus is not included, as shown in the non-bonus column in FIG. 14, the point is determined to be 1 point at a rate of 50% and to 2 points at a rate of 20%. It is determined to be 3 points at a rate of 20% and 5 points at a rate of 10%.

  When the point granting condition is established while the bonus is in effect, as shown in the bonus column of FIG. 14, the point to be given is determined to be 1 point at a rate of 85%, and 2 points at a rate of 10%. It is determined to be 3 points at a rate of 4% and 5 points at a rate of 1%.

  In this way, more points are determined as the granted points at a higher rate when the point granting condition is established during the bonus than when the point granting condition is established during the bonus.

  In addition, you may comprise so that a grant point may be determined in a different ratio according to whether it is during AT when point grant conditions are satisfied. More specifically, when the point granting condition is established during AT, it is configured so that more points are determined as grant points at a higher rate when established during non-AT. Also good. Accordingly, the first AT lottery can be performed more advantageously for the player when not in AT than in AT, and the interest of the game during non-AT can be improved.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that a grant point may be determined in a different ratio according to the game state when point grant conditions are satisfied. More specifically, it may be configured such that the awarded points are determined with reference to a table corresponding to the gaming state when the point granting conditions are established. Thereby, the expectation with respect to more points being awarded can be made different depending on the gaming state when the point granting condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In S2 of FIG. 12, a grant point is determined with reference to the table shown in FIG. 14, and grant point information for specifying the determined grant point is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. The sub-control unit 91 specifies a grant point resulting from the establishment of the current point grant condition based on the grant point information in the RAM 91c.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which it is determined whether or not the point granting condition is satisfied in S1, and the granted point is determined in S2 when the condition is satisfied. With regard to the determination of the points and the grant points, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that whether or not the points are awarded in one lottery and the grant points are determined. For example, it may be configured to determine any of points 0 to 5 when the player is in a high probability state other than the bonus and wins a melon in the normal gaming state. In this case, when the point is determined to be 0, no point is given.

  In S3, it is determined whether or not the current point grant condition that triggered the point grant is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted. That is, when the point granting conditions this time are conditions other than the bonus shown in FIG. 13A and established by winning a strawberry when in a high probability state, or when the bonus shown in FIG. It is determined whether any of the conditions established by winning and winning the nine winning combinations alone.

  In S3, when it is determined that the point granting condition is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted, the process proceeds to S8 described later in order to notify that a predetermined number of points have been granted. . In the present embodiment, for example, the point “1” is determined as the notification point.

  On the other hand, in S3, when it is not determined that the point granting condition is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted, the determination and notification of whether or not to notify that points have been granted The process proceeds to S4 in order to make a notice lottery for determining the number of points.

  In S4, a difference number notification lottery is performed. The difference number corresponding notice lottery means that the total number of points actually granted after the previous first AT lottery is established until the current point granting condition is satisfied, and the current point granting condition after the previous first AT lottery is established. Depending on the difference from the total number of points that have been informed until the establishment, a lottery to determine whether or not to provide the granted points set in S2 when the current point grant condition is established, and the granted points set in S2 It includes a lottery for determining whether or not to report accurately, and a lottery for determining how many points are lower when the granted points set in S2 are not accurately reported. In S4, the difference number is calculated from the total number of granted points (updated in S10) and the total number of notification points (updated in S9) described later. Specifically, the difference number is a value obtained by subtracting the total number of notification points from the total number of granted points.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a table for performing the difference number notification lottery. In the difference number correspondence notifying lottery in the present embodiment, first, referring to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 15A, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to notify points according to the difference number.

  When the difference number is “0”, it is determined to notify at 30% of the fact that the points have been granted in accordance with the setting of the granted points at S2, and not to notify at the rate of 70%. The When the difference number is “1”, it is determined to notify that a point has been granted in S2 at the rate of 40%, and not to be notified at a rate of 60%. The

  When the difference number is “2”, it is determined to notify the fact that the points have been provided in S2 at the rate of 50% and not to be notified at the rate of 50%. The When the difference number is “3 or more”, it is determined to notify 70% of the fact that the points have been provided in accordance with the setting of the granted points in S2, and not to notify at the rate of 30%. Is done.

  As described above, the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 15A is determined not to report a higher percentage as the difference number is smaller, and is reported as a higher ratio as the difference number is larger. To be decided. Thereby, when the difference number is already large, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large by not being further notified.

  When it is decided to notify with reference to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 15A, the granted points set in S2 with reference to the difference number correspondence table B in FIG. Depending on the difference, a lottery for determining whether or not to report the given point accurately and a lottery for determining the number of points to be notified when the given point is not reported correctly are performed. In the case where the notification is not performed accurately, the notification point is determined from the points that are less advantageous to the player in the first AT lottery than the awarded points, that is, the points that are less than the granted points.

  When the granted point is “1”, the point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 100% as a notification point regardless of the difference number. When the granted point is “2” and the difference number is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be point “1” at a rate of 30%, and point “2” at a rate of 70%. Determined. When the granted point is “2” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be point “1” at a rate of 20%, and point “2” at a rate of 80%. To be determined.

  When the granted point is “3” and the difference is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 10%, and the point “2” at a rate of 20%. ”And the point“ 3 ”at a rate of 70%. When the granted point is “3” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be point “2” at a rate of 10%, and point “3” at a rate of 90%. To be determined.

  When the granted point is “5” and the difference number is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be “2” at a rate of 10%, and the point “3” at a rate of 20%. ”And the point“ 5 ”at a rate of 70%. When the granted point is “5” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be “3” at a rate of 10%, and the point “5” at a rate of 90%. To be determined.

  In this way, in the difference number correspondence table B in FIG. 15B, the point to be notified is determined so that the fact that the smaller the difference number is, the fewer points than the granted points are given at a higher rate. The point to be notified is determined so that the higher the difference number is, the higher the proportion is given, or the fact that a point closer to the given point is given. In addition, the more points are given, the higher the rate is. As a result, when the difference number is already large, or when a large number of given points are likely to cause the difference number, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large due to the notification of even fewer points.

  In the difference number corresponding notification lottery according to the present embodiment, the example of determining whether to notify using the table of FIGS. 15A and 15B and the notification point has been described. Only whether or not to notify according to the difference number is determined using only the table of 15 (a), and when it is determined to notify, the grant point set in S2 may be accurately notified. . Moreover, you may comprise so that an alerting | reporting point may be determined according to a difference number using only the table of FIG.15 (b).

  Returning to FIG. 12, in S <b> 5, it is determined whether or not it is determined to notify that the points have been given by the difference number corresponding notification lottery of S <b> 4. When it is determined to notify, the process proceeds to S8 described later in order to notify that the point determined in S4 has been given. On the other hand, when it is not determined to notify in S5, the process proceeds to S6.

  In S6, a total number notification lottery is performed. The total number corresponding notice lottery refers to the granted points set in S2 when the present point grant condition is satisfied according to the total number of granted points (the total number of normal granted points other than the bonus, the total number of bonus granted points during the bonus). A lottery for determining whether or not to be notified, a lottery for determining whether or not to accurately notify the grant points set in S2, and how many points are to be notified when the grant points set in S2 are not accurately reported Includes lottery. In the case where the notification is not performed accurately, the notification point is determined from the points that are less advantageous to the player in the first AT lottery than the awarded points, that is, the points that are less than the granted points.

  It should be noted that the total number of points that are actually granted after the first AT lottery last time until the present point granting condition is satisfied is specified from the total number of granted points described later.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a table for performing the total number notification lottery. In the total number corresponding notification lottery in the present embodiment, first, with reference to the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 16A, a lottery is performed as to whether or not points are notified according to the total number of points actually assigned. It is.

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “0 to 1”, the granted points are set in S2. It is determined to notify that the points have been given at a rate of 80% and not to notify at a rate of 20%.

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “3-5”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “2-3”, the granted points are set in S2. It is determined to notify that a point has been given at a rate of 50% and not to notify at a rate of 50%.

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “4 to 5”, the granted points are set in S2. It is determined to notify that a point has been given at a rate of 10% and not to notify at a rate of 90%.

  As described above, the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 16A is determined to notify the fact that points have been granted at a higher rate as the total number of given points is smaller. The larger the number, the higher the ratio is determined not to be notified. Thereby, when only a small number of points are given, the player can be relieved to recognize that a small number of points are given by notifying at a high rate. On the other hand, by not being notified at a high rate when a large number of points are given, it is possible to increase the possibility that more points are actually given than the points recognized by the player from the notification points. , Can maintain a sense of expectation.

  When it is decided to notify by referring to the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 16A, further refer to the total number correspondence table B in FIG. Depending on the total number of points granted, a lottery for determining whether or not to accurately report the given points and a lottery for determining the number of points to be notified when the given points are not reported correctly are performed. It is.

  When the granted point is “1”, the point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 100% as a notification point regardless of the total number of given points. When the number of points given is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 70%.

  When the number of points awarded is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 50%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 50%.

  When the number of points awarded is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 90%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 10%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 10%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 20%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 70%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 20%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 50%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 50%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 20%.

  When the number of points given is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “3” is determined at a rate of 10%, and the point “5” is determined at a rate of 90%.

  When the number of points given is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, 10% of the points are determined as “1”, 10% of the points are determined as “2”, 30% of the points are determined as “3”, 50% of the points are determined as “5” It is determined.

  When the number of points awarded is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, , 30% of the points are determined as “1”, 30% of the points are determined as “2”, 30% of the points are determined as “3”, and 10% of the points are determined as “5”. It is determined.

  In this way, the total number correspondence table B in FIG. 16 (b) is assigned so that the smaller the total number of granted points, the higher the percentage of granted points or points closer to the granted points are notified. The point to be notified is determined so that the fact that a smaller number of points than the granted points are given at a higher rate is notified as the total number of the given points is larger. Thereby, when only a small number of points are given, it is possible to reassure the player by recognizing that a small number of points are given by accurately informing at a high rate. On the other hand, when a large number of points are given, a point that is less than the given points is notified at a high rate, so that more points are actually given than the points recognized by the player from the notification points. Can increase the possibility of being in the future, and can sustain expectations.

  In the total lot notification lottery according to the present embodiment, an example of determining whether or not to notify using the tables of FIGS. 16A and 16B and the notification point has been described. It may be configured to determine only whether or not to notify in accordance with the total number using only the table of (a), and to accurately notify the granted point set in S2 when it is determined to notify. Moreover, you may comprise so that an alerting | reporting point may be determined according to the total number using only the table of FIG.16 (b).

  Moreover, although the example which performs the difference number corresponding | compatible notification lottery and the total number corresponding | compatible notification lottery was demonstrated as the notification lottery in this Embodiment, you may comprise not only this but only any one. Further, the example of performing the total number corresponding notification lottery after performing the difference number corresponding notification lottery has been described, but the difference number corresponding notification lottery may be performed after performing the total number corresponding notification lottery.

  In the notification lottery according to the present embodiment, the example of determining whether to notify and the notification point according to the difference number and the total number has been described. However, the notification lottery is not limited thereto, and the difference number and the total number are determined. Regardless, it may be configured to determine whether or not to notify and the notification point according to the grant point set in S2.

  Returning to FIG. 12, in S <b> 7, it is determined whether or not it is determined to notify that the points have been awarded by the total number corresponding notification lottery of S <b> 6. When it is determined to notify, the process proceeds to S8 described later in order to notify that the point determined in S6 has been given. On the other hand, if it is not determined to notify in S7, the process proceeds to S10 without performing the process for notifying that the points have been granted.

  In S8, the notification process for performing the point provision effect which alert | reports that the point was provided is performed. In the notification process, when it is determined YES in S3, for example, information that can specify that point “1” has been granted is notified as a point grant effect (at the start or end of the game, “Acquire Point 1! To display a message such as “!”. Also, in the notification process, information that can specify that the point determined in S4 or S6 is given as a point granting effect is notified (for example, when notifying that the point “2” has been given) Then, at the start or end of the game, a process for displaying a message such as “Acquire Point 2!” Is performed.

  Note that the point granting effect is not limited to that executed in the above-described manner, and may be executed in any manner as long as the effect is executed in an aspect corresponding to the number of points given. .

  In S9, the notification point total number information for specifying the total number of notification points, which is the total number of points notified to the player by the process of S8 after the previous first AT lottery, is updated. Note that as the point granting effect notified in S8, information for specifying the total number of notification points (for example, a message such as “total number of acquired points 5!”) May be notified.

  The notification point total number information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and is added and updated for each point every time it is notified in S8 that a point has been given. The notification point total number information is reset after the first AT lottery is established and the first AT lottery condition shown in FIGS. 9 to 11 is satisfied.

  In S10, the total granted point information for specifying the total number of granted points, which is the total number of points actually given by the process of S2, is updated. The granted point total number information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and is added and updated for the given points after the given points are set in S2 and a notification lottery is performed.

  The total number of granted points information in the present embodiment is reset after the first AT lottery is established after the first AT lottery conditions shown in FIGS. 9 to 11 are established. Note that the total number of granted points is not limited to information reset when the first AT lottery is performed, and a predetermined number of points (for example, 2 points) out of the total number of granted points even after the first AT lottery is performed. May be carried over, or may be carried over when the AT is not won in the first AT lottery.

  In the present embodiment, as the upper limit of the total number of granted points, “10” is set in advance except during the bonus, and “5” is set in advance during the bonus. For this reason, when the granted points set in S2 are added to the total number of granted points until the current point grant condition is satisfied, the upper limit is set as the total number of granted points when the above-described upper limit is exceeded. Accordingly, as the upper limit of the total number of notification points, “10” is set in advance except for the bonus, and “5” is set in advance during the bonus. For this reason, in S8, when the point determined by the notification lottery or the like is notified, it is notified from the relationship with the total number of notification points that if the above-described upper limit value is exceeded, the point that becomes the upper limit value is given. The

  When the total number of notification points is already the upper limit value, notification is not performed in the same manner as when no points are given. Therefore, after the granted points are set in S2, if the total number of notification points is already the upper limit value, the point-related process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to S3 only when the total number of notification points is less than the upper limit value. You may comprise.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the point granting condition is established, whether or not to notify is determined according to the difference number or the total number of points actually assigned, It is determined and notified according to the determination result. In addition, the notification point is determined from the point that is less advantageous for the player in the first AT lottery than the actual granted point. For this reason, the points recognized by the player from the notification points are equal to or less than the total number of points actually given. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the total number of points actually granted may be greater than the total number of points specified from the notification points, and the total number of points specified from the notification points. Rather than being controlled by the AT.

  Next, the second AT lottery will be described. The sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs the second AT lottery by executing the second AT lottery process included in the AT control process. In the second AT lottery process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied based on a command from the main control unit 41, and the second AT lottery is executed when the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining lottery conditions that trigger the execution of the second AT lottery. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a table referred to in the second AT lottery.

  As shown in the normal game state column of FIG. 17, when the current game state is the normal game state or the preparation mode, the lottery condition is established by winning the bonus regardless of whether the effect state is AT. To do. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. For example, the sub control unit 91 specifies the current gaming state based on the gaming state command from the main control unit 41 and specifies that the bonus has been won based on the internal winning command from the main control unit 41.

  When the table shown in FIG. 18A is referred to, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 50%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 40%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 10%. Is determined to be 3, 3% of Navistock is determined to be 7%, Navistock is determined to be 10% of 2%, and Navistock is determined to be 20% of 1% The second AT lottery is performed.

  After the bonus, the AT is controlled according to the total number of navigation stocks determined in the first AT lottery described above as well as the number of navigation stocks determined in the second AT lottery. The total number of navigation stocks may be configured such that an upper limit number (for example, 20) is provided and the upper limit number is set when the total number is equal to or greater than the upper limit number.

  Also, as shown in the RT1 and AT columns in FIG. 17, when the RT is controlled by the AT, the lottery condition is established by winning the bonus. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG.

  When the table shown in FIG. 18B is referenced, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 35%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 20%. The second AT lottery is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 10 at a rate of 10%, and the navigation stock number is determined to be 20 at a rate of 5%. When the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. 18B, the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more, so that the AT is always controlled.

  Further, as shown in the RT1 and non-AT column in FIG. 17, in the case of non-ART, the lottery condition is satisfied every time 5 games are consumed or 30 bonuses are won. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table corresponding to the established lottery condition among the tables shown in FIG.

  In the second AT lottery process, in order to specify the number of games that have been digested after being controlled from the preparation mode or the normal gaming state to RT1, for example, the gaming state command from the main control unit 41 is received after being controlled by RT1. Every time it is done, a process of counting up a predetermined counter is performed. The count-up process is performed when RT1 is performed, and is continuously performed when RT2 is controlled by winning a promotion replay when RT1 is performed. That is, whether or not 30 games have been consumed and whether or not 5 games have been consumed in the 30 games are determined by using the total number of games of the number of games digested in RT1 and the number of games digested in RT2. The For this reason, when control to RT1 is started, control to RT is started regardless of whether a promotion replay was won and control was performed to RT2, or a special event was stopped and returned to RT1 in RT2. Since then, the players can be concentrated in the second AT lottery during 30 games, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The sub-control unit 41 specifies the number of games that have been consumed after being controlled by RT1 from the value of the counter, and the second AT lottery is executed when the number of games satisfies the lottery condition shown in FIG. For example, when the fifth game is ended after the control is made from RT1 in the preparation mode or the normal gaming state, it is determined that five games have been consumed, and the second AT lottery is executed. It should be noted that the value of the predetermined counter is reset by reaching 30, winning a fall replay, winning a bonus, or the like.

  When it is determined that 5 games have been consumed since the RT1 was controlled from the preparation mode or the normal gaming state, the number of navigation stocks is 0 at a rate of 99% with reference to the 5G digested table shown in FIG. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stock is determined to be 1 at a rate of 1%.

  If it is determined that a total of 10 games have been consumed after 5 games have been consumed and the RT1 has been controlled from the preparation mode or the normal gaming state, the table for the 10G digestion shown in FIG. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stock is determined to be 0 at the rate of%, and the number of navigation stock is determined to be 1 at the rate of 2%.

  If it is determined that a total of 15 games have been digested after 5 games are digested and the RT1 is controlled from the preparation mode or the normal gaming state, the table for digesting 15G shown in FIG. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stock is determined to be 0 at the rate of% and the number of navigation stock is determined to be 1 at the rate of 5%.

  If it is determined that a total of 20 games have been consumed after further 5 games have been consumed and the RT1 has been controlled from the preparation mode or the normal gaming state, the table at the time of 20G digestion shown in FIG. % Of Navistock is determined to be 0, 7% of Navistock is determined to be 1, 2% of Navistock is determined to be 3, and Navistock is 1% of Navistock. The second AT lottery is performed as determined by 5.

  If it is determined that a total of 25 games have been digested after 5 games are digested and the RT1 is controlled from the preparation mode or the normal gaming state, the table for digesting 25G shown in FIG. % Of Navistock is determined as 0, 20% of Navistock is determined as 1, 5% of Navistock is determined as 3, Navistock is determined as 3% The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at a rate of 2%.

  Further, when it is determined that a total of 30 games have been consumed after further 5 games have been digested and the RT1 is controlled from the preparation mode or the normal gaming state, the table for the 30G digestion shown in FIG. % Of Navistock is determined to be 1, 25% of Navistock is determined to be 3, 10% of Navistock is determined to be 5, and Navistock of 3% is determined to be Navistock. The second AT lottery is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 20 at a rate of 2%. When the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table at the time of 30G digestion shown in FIG. 18 (d), the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more. Become.

  In addition, when a bonus is won in a non-ART, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30% with reference to the bonus winning table shown in FIG. The Navistock number is determined to be 5 at a rate of 20%, the Navistock number is determined to be 10 at a rate of 10%, and the Navistock number is determined to be 20 at a rate of 5%. A second AT lottery will be held. When the second AT lottery is made with reference to the bonus winning table shown in FIG. 18 (d), the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more. Become.

  Also, as shown in the RT2 and AT columns in FIG. 17, when the control is performed by the AT at RT2, the lottery condition is established by winning a bonus. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG.

  When the table shown in FIG. 18C is referenced, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 60%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 25%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 10%. The second AT lottery is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 10 at a rate of 3%, and the navigation stock number is determined to be 20 at a rate of 2%.

  When the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. 18C, the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more, so that the AT is always controlled.

  In addition, as shown in the RT2 and non-AT column in FIG. 17, when non-ART, as in the case of non-AT in RT1, every time 5 games are consumed or bonus winning is performed until 30 games are consumed. As a result, the lottery condition is established, and the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table corresponding to the established lottery condition among the tables shown in FIG. In addition, in the table shown in FIG. 18 (d), the table at the time of 30G digestion and bonus winning is referred to, and when the second AT lottery is performed during non-ART, the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more. Therefore, it is always controlled by the AT.

  Here, when the game state is the normal game state or the preparation mode, when it is RT1, when it is RT2, the degree of advantage for the player in the second AT lottery executed in each is compared. The degree of advantage for the player is, for example, the ratio at which the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more in the AT lottery, that is, the ratio controlled by the AT, and the level at which the number of navigation stocks is determined in the AT lottery is high or low And so on.

  First, when the lottery condition is satisfied by winning the bonus, in the second AT lottery executed in the normal gaming state or the preparation mode, the table shown in FIG. 18A is referred to and is RT1 or RT2. In the second AT lottery executed sometimes, the tables shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C or the table shown at the time of winning the bonus in FIG. 18D are referred to. For this reason, in the case of RT1 or RT2, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state or preparation mode, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be higher at a higher rate. The In other words, in RT1 or RT2, it is advantageous to the player by being controlled by AT at a higher rate and by determining a higher number of navigation stocks at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state or preparation mode. Thus, it can be said that AT lottery is performed. As a result, when it is RT1 or RT2, it can have a sense of expectation to be controlled by the AT and acquire a larger number of navigation stocks than when it is in the normal gaming state or the preparation mode. Can improve the interest of

  Furthermore, in non-ART, every time 5 games are digested until 30 games are digested without winning a strawberry or bonus, the table for digesting 5G-30G shown in FIG. 18 (d) is referred to. 2AT lottery. For this reason, in the non-ART, the AT is controlled at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. In non-ART, as described above, by winning the bonus, the AT is controlled at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state or the preparation mode, and the navigation stock number is determined to be higher at a higher rate. Thus, it can be said that the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player. As a result, in non-ART, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for being controlled by the AT and to improve the interest of the game.

  In non-ART, as shown in the 5G-30G digestion table in FIG. 18 (d), the ratio is controlled by AT and the number of navigation stocks is larger in proportion to the number of digested games. The winning rate is set so that each percentage increases. That is, in non-ART, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the RT1 or RT2 is maintained and the game is digested as many times as possible without winning the fall replay, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the second AT lottery executed by winning a bonus in ART, the table shown in FIG. 18B is referred to when the gaming state at the time of winning the bonus is RT1, and FIG. The table shown in (c) is referenced. For this reason, in any ART, the bonus is selected and the AT is always controlled after the bonus ends. However, the number of navigation stocks at RT1 is determined to be higher at a higher rate than at RT2. . That is, it can be said that AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by being determined at a higher rate at a higher rate than RT2 when it is ART1 when it is ART1. . As a result, when being controlled by the AT, a sense of expectation for winning a bonus at RT1 can be given, and the fun of the game can be improved. Therefore, in ART, for example, even when the replay win probability is higher than RT1, even if it is controlled to RT2, when nine roles are intentionally dropped or controlled by RT1 without following the navigation effect Even so, it is possible to add the fun of playing a game at RT1 by not promoting the promotion replay according to the navigation effect.

  For each table shown in FIG. 18 (d), there are a plurality of types with different ratios controlled by AT or a larger number of navigation stocks depending on whether the gaming state is RT1 or RT2. A table may be provided. In this case, the second AT lottery may be performed with reference to a table corresponding to the gaming state when the lottery condition is satisfied. As a result, the expectation for being controlled by the AT and obtaining a larger number of navigation stocks can be made different depending on the gaming state when the lottery conditions are established, and the fun of the game can be improved. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the lottery conditions determined in accordance with the current game state and performance state are satisfied by the second AT lottery process performed by the sub-control unit 91. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the corresponding table shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, even when the above-described notification promotion condition is satisfied, the corresponding number of navigation stocks is added to the number of navigation stocks determined by the AT lottery. That is, the sub-control unit 91 stores, in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, the navigation stock number information indicating the total number obtained by adding the corresponding navigation stock number to the navigation stock number determined by the AT lottery when the notification promotion condition is satisfied. Store. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining the number of navigation stocks added when the notification promoting condition is satisfied.

  When the notification promotion condition is established by winning the strawberry (1) shown in FIG. 7 (f) in the bonus, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 50%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 50%. 2 is determined.

  Further, when the notification promoting condition is established by winning strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) shown in FIG. 7 (f) in the bonus, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, when the notification promoting condition is satisfied, the control is always performed by the AT regardless of the result of the AT lottery. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation that the notification promotion condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the number of navigation stocks determined when winning strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) is determined to be larger than the number of winning strawberry (1) alone. That is, it can be said that AT is controlled so that the player who wins strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) is more advantageous to the player than the player who wins strawberry (1) alone. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the notification promotion condition is established by winning strawberry (1) + strawberry (2), and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs the AT management process included in the AT control process, thereby updating the navigation stock number information according to the result of the AT lottery and the result of success or failure of the notification promotion condition. Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs AT management processing, so that the number of navigation stocks is decremented by 1 when the number of navigation stocks is 1 or more and the predetermined AT activation timing is reached during non-AT. At the same time, the AT flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and the effect state is controlled to AT.

  The AT activation timing in the present embodiment indicates an expected value of the number of games that need to be digested from when the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established in the non-AT until actually controlled by the AT. It is determined according to the type of lottery conditions that triggered the acquired AT lottery, that is, the opportunity to acquire the number of navigation stocks (hereinafter also referred to as navigation stock acquisition opportunity). FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the AT activation timing determined for each navigation stock acquisition opportunity.

  As shown in FIGS. 9, 17, 19, etc., the opportunity to acquire Navistock in a non-AT is a strawberry win in a non-AT, a bonus win in a non-AT, a bonus winning in a non-AT, a non-ART A predetermined number of games are used, and a notification promotion condition is established in the bonus won during non-AT.

  Bonus winning during non-AT, end of bonus won during non-AT, and AT activation timing according to establishment of notification promotion conditions in bonus won during non-AT are special The timing is set to be controlled to RT1 by the stop. Therefore, when Navi stock is acquired in the bonus lottery during non-AT, the AT lottery executed by the end of the bonus won during non-AT, and when the notification promotion conditions in the bonus won during non-AT are established, When acquired, it is controlled by the AT when RT1 is started after the bonus ends. The expected value of the number of games required for the special game to stop in the preparation mode is, for example, 1 / {(9000/65536) × (from the winning rate and winning rate of each of the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) 8/9)} ≈8.

  In addition, the AT activation timing corresponding to the strawberry winning during non-AT or the digestion of a predetermined number of games during non-ART is set for each gaming state when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established, as shown in FIG. Yes.

  In the non-AT preparation mode or RT1, the AT activation timing when the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established by winning the strawberry or digesting the predetermined number of games, after that, in the normal game state once won the fall replay It is set to the timing controlled to RT1 again by digesting 32 games.

  For example, when the opportunity to acquire Navistock is established by winning a strawberry or digesting a predetermined number of games when RT1, the fall replay is won and the RT1 ends, or when the promotion replay is won when RT1 After RT2 ends and RT1 ends, the game is not controlled by the AT until the normal gaming state is ended by digesting 32 games. Also, when the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established by winning the strawberry in the preparation mode, the preparation mode ends, and after the fall replay is won and the RT1 ends, or when the promotion replay is won at RT1 After the RT2 is finished and the RT1 is finished, the AT is not controlled until the normal gaming state is finished by digesting the 32 games.

  In the present embodiment, the average number of games required until the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established and controlled by the AT is the expected number of games required until the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established and controlled by the AT. means. For example, in the non-AT preparation mode, the average number of games required until the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established and controlled by the AT is the average number of games required from the preparation mode to RT1. If the average number of games required to be controlled in the normal gaming state is B, (A + B + 32) is obtained.

  In addition, the average number of games required until the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established in the non-AT RT1 and is controlled by the AT is the average number of games required until the normal gaming state is controlled from the RT1 as described above. If B, then (B + 32).

  Also, when RT2 is in non-AT, the AT activation timing when the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established by winning the strawberry or digesting a predetermined number of games is set to be determined by lottery based on random numbers extracted from random counters, for example Has been.

  Specifically, for example, the AT activation timing is determined to be the timing at which the next game is started at a rate of 1%, and after RT2 ends and RT1 ends at a rate of 99%, further 32 games are digested. It is determined at the timing when the normal gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is controlled to RT1. As a result, when the opportunity to acquire Navistock is established when RT2 is non-AT, a high percentage of games will be consumed at the same rate as in the preparation mode. Since it is sometimes controlled by the AT, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that, when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established at RT2, there is a very low probability even if the next game may be controlled by AT, so the number of games that must be digested before being controlled by AT It can be said that the expected value is larger than when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established when the expected value is RT1. On the other hand, when the opportunity to acquire Navistock is established at RT2, there is a possibility that the game may be premier but controlled from the next game to the AT, and the expectation of the number of games that must be digested before being controlled by the AT It can be said that the value is smaller than when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established in the preparation mode.

  In the non-AT RT2, the average number of games required until the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established and controlled by the AT is temporarily controlled from the preparation mode to RT1. Because it is the same as the average number of games required for the game, A is set as described above, B is the average number of games required to be controlled from the RT1 to the normal game state, and the AT is activated from the next game. If the number of games to be subtracted is C (C <A, B), then (A + B−C + 32). That is, the expected value of the number of games required to be controlled by the AT is greater than when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established at RT1 during non-AT. On the other hand, the expected value of the number of games required to be controlled by the AT is smaller than when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established in the non-AT preparation mode.

  In addition, the AT activation timing when the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established by winning the strawberry when in the non-AT normal gaming state, the digestion of the remaining game in the normal gaming state and the completion of the normal gaming state, The timing is set to be controlled to RT1.

  The average number of games required until the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established and controlled by the AT in the non-AT normal gaming state is (32−α), where α is the number of games consumed in the normal gaming state. That is, the expected value of the number of games required to be controlled by the AT is smaller than when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established in the non-AT preparation mode, RT1, RT2.

  As described above, the AT activation timing is set so that the expected value of the number of games to be consumed before being controlled by the AT differs depending on the type of gaming state when the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established when it is non-AT Has been. For this reason, the expected value of the number of games to be consumed before being controlled by the AT can be changed according to the type of gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved. It can be said that the AT activation timing has a higher degree of advantage for the player as the AT activation timing is reached with less number of games. Therefore, the AT activation timing in the present embodiment is determined when the gaming state when the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established is the normal gaming state in consideration of the average number of games that need to be digested before being controlled by the AT. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is highest, and the degree of advantage for the player is lowered in the order of RT1, RT2, and the preparation mode.

  By performing AT management processing, the sub-control unit 91 sets navigation stock number information according to the establishment of the navigation stock acquisition opportunity, and sets an activation start waiting flag for specifying the corresponding AT activation timing. The activation start waiting flag refers to, for example, a flag corresponding to the end of the normal gaming state, a flag corresponding to the end of the current game, and the like.

  In the AT management process, for example, when the activation start waiting flag corresponding to the end of the current game is set, the sub control unit 91 determines that the current game based on the game state command received from the main control unit 41 when the current game ends. When it is determined that the game has ended, the activation start waiting flag corresponding to the end of the current game is cleared. In addition, in the AT management process, for example, when the activation start waiting flag corresponding to the end of the normal gaming state is set, the sub control unit 91 receives the gaming state command received from the main control unit 41 at the end of the previous game, and this time When it is determined that the RT1 is controlled from the normal gaming state based on the gaming state command received at the end of the game, the activation start waiting flag corresponding to the end of the normal gaming state is cleared.

  Depending on the type of gaming state when the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established due to the bonus winning during the non-AT, the end of the bonus won during the non-AT, and the establishment of the notification promotion conditions in the bonus won during the non-AT The AT activation timing controlled by the AT may be varied. As a result, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the AT management process, the sub-control unit 91 transmits a command (for example, a BET command, an internal number) transmitted when the game is started when the number of navigation stocks is 1 or more and the activation start waiting flag is not set. When the winning command, reel rotation command, etc. are received (that is, when the AT trigger timing is reached and the game is started), the number of navigation stock is updated by 1 and AT indicating that it is controlled by AT The flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c and the effect state is controlled to AT. Thereby, while the game is digested a predetermined number of times (for example, 50), it is controlled by ART and a navigation effect can be executed.

  In this embodiment, the ART is controlled when the AT activation timing is reached and the game is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the navigation target combination (for example, fall replay) is performed after the AT activation timing is reached. You may make it control to ART when winning. In addition, only when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established without going through the bonus, that is, when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established by winning the strawberry or using the predetermined number of games, the AT target timing ( For example, it may be controlled to ART when winning a fall replay. Thus, for example, even when the player specifies that the game is controlled from the number of digested games and the like to RT1, and the game is not controlled by the AT at the start of the game, It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that AT will be started when winning the navigation target role.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs AT management processing, and counts the number of games played when it is ART. At this time, when the number of games digested reaches a predetermined number, if the number of navigation stocks indicated by the navigation stock number information is 0, the AT flag is cleared and the AT is terminated, and the navigation stock number information is 1 or more. When it is determined that the number of the navigation effect stocks is, the navigation stock number is consumed by one point, and the ART is continuously controlled until the game is consumed a predetermined number of times.

  As described above, in the case of RT1 or RT2, by consuming 1 point of the number of navigation stocks, it is controlled to ART while a predetermined number of games are consumed. Further, even when the game has been digested a predetermined number of times in ART, it is again controlled to ART while digesting the predetermined number of games on condition that the number of navigation stocks is still 1 or more. Thereby, it can be said that the ART can be controlled over a period corresponding to the number of navigation stocks set according to the result of the AT lottery and the result of success or failure of the notification promotion condition. Further, it can be said that the ART can be repeatedly controlled by the number of times corresponding to the number of navigation stocks set according to the result of the AT lottery and the result of success or failure of the notification promotion condition.

  It has been described that during the ART, the during-ART effect is executed as the gaming state effect. In the production during ART, information indicating the number of games digested during ART controlled by consuming 1 point of the number of navigation stock (for example, displaying a message such as “15 remaining games!”) Is notified. When the game that the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of times is finished, it is possible to specify that the ART effect is once ended, and if the ART is subsequently controlled subsequently, the ART is continued at the start of the next game. Information (for example, displaying a message such as “Continue!”) Is notified. Thereby, the expectation with respect to whether ART continues for every predetermined number of times can be improved effectively.

  In addition, in the AT management process, when the AT flag is set, the sub-control unit 91 adds and adds the number of navigation stocks when the number of navigation stocks is further acquired by AT lottery.

  If the bonus is selected when the AT flag is set, the main control unit 41 controls the internal RT, but the sub-control unit 91 continuously performs the ART effect, and RT1 and RT2. The navigation effect is executed in the same way. Note that, in the internal RT, even if the navigation effect is executed, it is not counted as the number of games that have been digested during the ART.

  Further, in the bonus won during the AT, the sub bonus control unit 91 executes the same bonus effect as the bonus won during the non-AT. In addition, after the bonus won during the AT is over, the navigation effect can be executed again from the time when the preparation mode is over and the RT1 is controlled. As a result, the navigation effect is executed in the preparation mode and nine winning combinations are won, and the inconvenience that the RT1 is not controlled indefinitely can be prevented.

  In addition, when the sub control unit 91 in the present embodiment is ART, a navigation effect according to the result of the internal winning is executed by performing a navigation effect execution process included in the game effect execution process. The result of the internal winning is specified from the internal winning command from the main control unit 41.

  For example, in ART, when a fall replay is won, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay that is won simultaneously with the fall replay is executed, and when a promotion replay is won, a navigation effect according to the type of promotion replay is executed. This is executed, and a navigation effect is executed according to the type of the nine winning combination that is won when one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won.

  As a navigation effect, when a normal replay + falling replay is won, an effect is displayed to display information for first stopping the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C, for example, “Press from left or inside!” When normal replay + falling replay + BAR replay is won, an effect of displaying a message such as “Press from the right!” Is executed.

  In addition, when one of the promotion replays (1) to (3) is won, information that can identify the type of the promoted replay selected, for example, when the promotion replay (1) is won, “Aim for the right BAR!” When the promotion replay (2) is won, an effect that displays a message such as “Aim for the right red 7!” Is executed. When the promotion replay (3) is won, “right The effect of displaying a message such as “Aim at White 7!” Is executed.

  In addition, when winning any of the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9), information that can identify the type of the winning 9 winning combination, for example, when winning 9 winning combinations (1), The effect of displaying a message such as “7, aim at the right red 7!” Is executed, and when winning 9 roles (9), the effect of displaying a message such as “Aim at the left BAR and the right BAR!” Executed.

  The navigation effect relating to the fall replay, the navigation effect relating to the promotion replays (1) to (3), and the navigation effect relating to the nine-piece roles (1) to (9) are both messages for specifying the operation procedure on the liquid crystal display 51. It is executed in a common notification mode by displaying. For this reason, the information notified by the navigation effect is information for avoiding the fall replay, the information for winning the promotion replays (1) to (3), or the 9-card combination (1). It is not necessary to specify whether the information is for winning (9) or not, and by performing a stop operation according to the information notified in a common notification mode, a fall replay winning can be avoided and the promoted replay being won , 9 winning combinations can be won.

  The navigation effects are not limited to those executed in the above-described manner, and may be executed in any manner as long as the effects are executed in a manner corresponding to the internal winning result.

  As described above, in ART, navigation effects are executed in association with the fall replay winning, the promotion replay winning, and the nine-piece winning combination. For this reason, it is possible to intentionally avoid the fall replay winning when the AT is at RT1 and to control the RT2 by winning the promoted replay. In addition, since it is possible to intentionally not miss nine winning combinations during the AT in RT2, the RT2 can be continued. Even if nine winning combinations are missed in RT2, RT2 is controlled by avoiding the fall replay winning again in RT1 and winning the promotion replay. For this reason, in RT2, even if the stop operation is failed once and 9 special combinations are missed and the special game is stopped, it is controlled only by RT1 so that it does not fall into the normal gaming state. It is configured.

  On the other hand, when the AT flag is not set, it is not controlled by the ART, and the navigation effect is not executed when the fall replay, the promotion replay, or the 9-piece combination (during RT2) is won. For this reason, it becomes difficult to continue RT1 and RT2, and it becomes easy to control to a normal gaming state.

  As described above, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment performs the AT control process based on the command from the main control unit 41, thereby controlling the effect state according to the result of the AT lottery and the success or failure of the notification promotion condition. When it is AT, a navigation effect is executed.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment is in a non-AT state at RT1, or when it is a period until a predetermined number of games are consumed after the non-AT RT1 is controlled to the normal gaming state. By performing the non-AT-time navigation effect execution process, when any of the 9 sheet combinations (1) to (9) is won, the navigation effect corresponding to the type of the 9 sheet combination selected is executed. Whether or not the non-AT navigation lottery is performed, and the navigation effect corresponding to the type of the nine winning combination selected when the winning is made in the non-AT navigation lottery is executed.

  For example, when the player is in non-AT at RT1 or when it is a period from the non-AT RT1 to the normal gaming state until a predetermined number of games are consumed, (9) When one of the above is won, a non-AT navigation lottery is executed, and it is determined to execute a navigation effect corresponding to the type of nine winning combinations selected at a rate of 90%, and a navigation effect at a rate of 10% Is determined not to execute.

  As described above, when the player is in non-AT at RT1 or is in a normal gaming state from RT1 in non-AT, and wins a predetermined number of games, he wins any of nine roles (1) to (9). Sometimes the corresponding navigation effects are executed at a predetermined rate. This makes it possible to reduce the missing of nine winning combinations during a non-AT time in RT1 or in a period in which a predetermined number of games are consumed under the control of the normal gaming state from RT1 in non-AT. The predetermined ratio is not limited to the above winning rate. For example, when one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won during a non-AT in RT1 or during a period in which a predetermined number of games are consumed under the non-AT RT1 in a normal gaming state The navigation effect may be executed at a rate of 100%.

  It should be noted that the number of games that are controlled from the non-AT RT1 to the normal gaming state and execute the navigation effect at the time of winning the 9-game winning combination is from a plurality of games (for example, 0 to 3) every time the normal gaming state is controlled. You may comprise so that it may be determined at random. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the RT1 is controlled to the normal gaming state. For example, a player who missed winning a fall replay can be given an impression as if it is still RT1 by executing a nine-player navigation effect while in the normal gaming state. .

  Next, the expectation effect will be described. The sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment performs an expectation effect according to the situation of the internal lottery and the AT lottery by performing a game effect execution process. In the expectation production, the first expectation production for giving the player a sense of expectation for winning the bonus, and the second expectation for giving the player a sense of expectation for the AT lottery. Including production. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining an expectation effect lottery table used for an expectation effect lottery. In the present embodiment, an expectation effect lottery table is provided according to the gaming state.

  FIG. 21A is an expectation effect lottery table which is referred to when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the preparation mode. In the bonus winning game, it is determined that the first expectation effect is executed at a rate of 60% and the second expectation effect is executed at a rate of 30%. In games where AT lottery is executed (except for games where AT lottery is executed by bonus winning), the first expectation effect is 30%, and the second expectation effect is 60%. It is decided to execute. In a game in which no bonus is won and AT lottery is not executed, it is determined that the first expectation effect is executed at a rate of 10% and the second expectation effect is executed at a rate of 10%.

  Thus, since the first expectation effect is executed at a higher rate when the bonus is won than when the AT lottery is executed, the expectation that the bonus is won when the first expectation effect is executed. Can be held by the player. In addition, since the second expectation effect is executed at a higher rate when the AT lottery is executed than when the bonus is won, the game has a sense of expectation that the bonus is won when the second expectation effect is executed. Can be held by a person.

  FIG. 21B is an expectation effect lottery table that is referred to when the gaming state is in RT1. In the game where the bonus is won, it is determined that the first expectation effect is executed at a rate of 70% and the second expectation effect is executed at a rate of 20%. Also, in games where AT lottery has been executed (except for games where AT lottery was executed by bonus winning), the first expectation effect is 20% and the second expectation effect is 70%. It is decided to execute. In a game in which no bonus is won and no AT lottery is executed, it is determined that the first expectation effect is executed at a rate of 5% and the second expectation effect is executed at a rate of 5%.

  FIG. 21C is an expectation effect lottery table that is referred to when the gaming state is during RT2. In the bonus winning game, it is determined that the first expectation effect is executed at a rate of 80% and the second expectation effect is executed at a rate of 10%. Also, in games where AT lottery has been executed (except for games where AT lottery has been executed by bonus winning), the first expectation effect is 10% and the second expectation effect is 80%. It is decided to execute. In a game in which no bonus is won and no AT lottery is executed, it is determined that the first expectation effect is executed at a rate of 2% and the second expectation effect is executed at a rate of 2%.

  In this way, the first expectation effect is produced at a higher rate at the time of winning the bonus when the game state is in RT1 and in RT2 than in the normal game state or in the preparation mode. Since it is executed, it is possible to increase the percentage of bonus winning when the first expectation effect is executed (hereinafter also referred to as bonus reliability). In addition, the second expectation effect is executed at a higher rate when the AT lottery is executed when the game state is in the RT1 and further in the RT2 than in the normal game state or the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the rate at which AT lottery is executed when the second expectation effect is executed (hereinafter also referred to as AT lottery reliability). In addition, when the game state is in the RT1 state and further in the RT2 state than in the normal game state or in the preparation mode, the expectation is higher in the game in which the bonus is not won and the AT lottery is not executed. Since the effect is executed at a lower rate, it is possible to lower the rate at which the bonus is not won and the AT lottery is not executed when the expectation effect is executed.

  That is, the proportion of the expectation effect to be executed and the expectation effect are executed according to the game state (the normal game state, the preparation mode, RT1, RT2) in which the common game state effect is executed at the non-AT. The bonus reliability and AT lottery reliability can be made different. In addition, according to the gaming state (RT1, RT2) in which a common gaming state effect is executed at the time of AT, the ratio that the expectation effect is executed, the bonus reliability when the expectation effect is executed, AT lottery reliability can be varied.

  The sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment further wins a continuous effect and bonus for notifying information related to bonus winning or acquisition of the number of navigation stocks over a plurality of games by performing a game effect executing process. After being notified that there is a chance to win a bonus without replaying or winning a small role for a replay that is controlled to be drawn on the winning line preferentially over the bonus, and winning the small role However, it is a chance timing to win the winning bonus because it is confirmed that the small role cannot be won from the symbols (or symbol combinations) stopped on some of the reels, and that it will be missed. A chance effect to be notified can be executed as a game effect. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved effectively.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1-1) In the above-described embodiment, when a fall replay is won in RT1, the game state is controlled to the normal gaming state. As described with reference to FIG. 8A, this fall replay avoids the operation procedure and winning for winning depending on whether normal replay + fall replay is won or whether normal replay + fall replay + BAR replay is won. The operating procedures for each are different. In addition, when it is RT1, if it wins any one of the promoted replays (1) to (3), it is controlled to RT2, which further improves the replay winning probability. Further, if the nine-piece combination (1) to (9) is missed in the RT2, it is controlled by the RT2. However, for each of the promoted replays (1) to (3) and the nine-piece roles (1) to (9), even if they are elected, the stop switch must be operated at an appropriate timing to be able to win these roles. If you can not win.

  On the other hand, when controlled by the AT, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay that is won simultaneously with the fall replay is executed. For this reason, when controlled by the AT, even when the fall replay is won, it can be operated according to the navigation procedure according to the operation procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning.

  In addition, when controlled by the AT, when winning one of the promotion replays (1) to (3) or winning one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9), the winning prize won A navigation effect corresponding to the type of role is executed. For this reason, when being controlled by the AT, it is possible to operate in accordance with an operation procedure for winning a promoted replay or winning 9 winning combinations. Therefore, when being controlled by the AT, it is possible to avoid being controlled to the normal gaming state, it is easy to control from RT1 to RT2, and it is easy to continue RT2, so in a state advantageous to the player It can be said that there is. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled by the AT. Also, in RT, it is possible to give the player a clear degree of advantage depending on whether or not it is controlled by AT, effectively increasing the expectation for being controlled by ART, and improving the interest of the game. Can do.

  In the above-described embodiment, the expected value of the number of navigation stocks is determined to be different by changing the ratio of acquiring the navigation stock for control by the AT and the ratio of acquiring a larger number of navigation stocks. Of the tables shown in FIGS. 10A to 10C and FIGS. 18A to 18D, the table corresponding to the gaming state (the normal gaming state, RT1, RT2, etc.) when the AT lottery condition is satisfied. AT lottery is executed using.

  On the other hand, during non-AT, a common gaming state effect is executed during RT1 and RT2 that can be controlled by AT according to the number of navigation stocks, and during a normal gaming state that is not controlled by AT. . For this reason, during non-AT, the player cannot specify from the gaming state effect whether the player is in RT or in the normal gaming state. Also, during the AT, a common gaming state effect is executed during RT1 and RT2. For this reason, during AT, the player cannot specify from the gaming state effect whether it is in RT1 or RT2.

  As a result, it is possible to add the fun that the player expects the gaming state that is actually controlled, and to increase the navigation stock at a higher rate for the player according to the gaming state that is actually controlled. It is possible to change the sense of expectation for the acquisition and to improve the interest of the game.

  (1-2) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, a game that is digested before being controlled by the AT, depending on the gaming state when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established during the non-AT. AT activation timings with different numbers of expected values are set. For this reason, the expected value of the number of games that need to be digested before being controlled by the AT can be changed according to the game state that is actually controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, the RT1 is controlled to RT2 by the promotion replay winning at RT1, and is controlled to RT1 by stopping the special outcome at RT2. That is, since the start timing of each of RT1 and RT2 is a symbol combination on the winning line, even if a common gaming state effect is executed, the gaming state actually controlled from the symbol combination is RT1 or RT2. The player can specify this. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the symbol combinations that are stopped as a result of the game.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, the normal game state is controlled by the fall replay winning at RT1. For this reason, even if a common gaming state effect is executed during non-AT between RT1 and the normal gaming state, the player is informed that the gaming state actually controlled from the symbol combination has been controlled from RT1 to the normal gaming state. Can be identified. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the symbol combinations that are stopped as a result of the game. Also, RT1 is controlled by digesting 32 games in the normal gaming state. For this reason, the player can be concentrated in the game itself without causing anxiety that no matter how much the game is consumed in the normal game state, the game state may not be controlled.

  (4) In RT2 in which the replay winning probability is improved over RT1 in the above-described embodiment, the falling replay is not won and the game is not controlled in the normal gaming state. For this reason, the expectation for the promotion replay in RT1 to be controlled by RT2, and even if the stop operation is mistaken when RT2 is controlled, the normal gaming state is not immediately controlled. Such a sense of security can be given to the player.

  (5) In the embodiment described above, the expectation effect lottery is performed with reference to the table corresponding to the game state among the tables of FIGS. 21A to 21C. It is possible to add the fun of predicting the gaming state that is actually controlled from the frequency, and to vary the bonus reliability and AT lottery reliability when the expectation effect is executed according to which gaming state Can improve the interest of the game.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established in the normal gaming state that is not controlled by the AT, the normal gaming state ends and is controlled to RT1. Although controlled by the AT, when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established in the RT that can be controlled by the AT, the control is performed by the AT when the normal gaming state is completed and the RT1 is controlled after the RT ends. For this reason, since it is not necessary to end RT, AT is controlled with a relatively small number of games when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established in the normal gaming state than in RT. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, although not controlled by the AT, the player can have a sense of expectation that the AT will be controlled at an earlier timing than when the RT is controlled.

  Also, when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established at RT1, it is controlled to AT when the normal gaming state is further ended and controlled to RT1 after the RT1 ends, but when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established at RT2. After the RT2 is finished and the RT1 is finished, the normal gaming state is finished and the RT1 is controlled when the RT1 is controlled. For this reason, since it is not essential to end RT2, when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established at RT1, it is controlled to AT with a relatively small number of games compared to RT2. Therefore, in RT1, although the replay winning probability is lower than that in RT2, the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled by AT at an earlier timing than when controlled by RT2.

  (7-1) In the embodiment described above, one or more navigation stocks are determined in the AT lottery such as the first AT lottery shown in FIGS. 9 to 11 and the second AT lottery shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. Thus, the AT is controlled.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the first AT lottery among the AT lotteries is performed at the time of the lottery opportunity winning and at the end of the bonus. In the 1st AT lottery performed at the time of winning the lottery opportunity, according to the total number of granted points given in addition to the bonus, the higher the total number of granted points, the higher the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more. The lottery will be drawn according to the winning rate specified in. In addition, in the first AT lottery performed at the end of the bonus, according to the total number of granted points given during the bonus, the larger the total number of granted points, the higher the number of navigation stocks is set to 1 or more. The lottery will be drawn according to the winning rate specified in. Therefore, the player is given more points so that the first AT lottery is performed according to the winning rate determined to be determined to be a higher number of navigation stocks of 1 or more at a higher rate. It can make you expect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the point-related processing shown in FIG. 12, the point granting effect for notifying that a point has been granted in S8 is provided on the condition that the point granting condition is established and the point is granted. An informing process is performed. In this notification process, based on the processing results of S3 to S6 in FIG. 12, the point grant effect that accurately notifies the grant points set in S2 in FIG. 12 or the grant points set in S2 in FIG. A point giving effect for informing a small number of points is executed. In the point-related processing shown in FIG. 12, even when the point granting condition is satisfied and points are awarded, if it is decided not to be notified in the notice lottery of S4 or S6 in FIG. Is not executed, and no notification is given that points have been awarded. For this reason, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that more points than the total number of points specified from the executed point giving effect may be actually given.

  As a result, the first AT lottery is performed according to the winning rate determined to be determined to be 1 or more and a larger number of navigation stock at a higher rate, and the point granting effect is controlled by the AT. It is possible to have a greater sense of expectation than the total number of points specified from. In addition, even when the total number of points specified from the point granting effect is relatively small, more points than the total number of points may actually be given, so a higher ratio of 1 or more and more It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the first AT lottery will be performed according to the winning rate determined so as to be determined by a large number of navigation stocks and that the AT will be controlled.

  Further, in the point related processing shown in FIG. 12, a point granting effect is performed for the grant point set in S2 of FIG. 12 on the condition that the point granting condition is satisfied and the point is granted. For this reason, the above-mentioned feeling of expectation can be raised step by step every time the point giving effect is executed. In addition, in order for the player to predict the total number of points given, it is possible to add an interest that the player himself accumulates and stores the points specified from the executed point giving effects.

  (7-2) In the difference lot notification lottery in S4 of the point related process, the tables shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B are referred to, and whether or not to notify and whether or not to give the given point accurately Is determined with a probability corresponding to the difference between the total number of notification points specified from the already performed point granting effects and the total number of granted points actually given. Further, in the difference number notification lottery, when the difference number is larger than when the difference number is small, it is determined to notify at a higher rate, and at a higher rate, points awarded or points closer to the given point are given. A notification point is determined so as to notify the user of the fact. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large and the reliability of the point specified from the point giving effect from becoming too low.

  (7-3) In the total lot notification lottery in S6 of the point-related processing, the tables shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B are referred to, and whether or not to notify and whether or not to give the given point accurately are determined. It is determined with a probability corresponding to the total number of granted points actually given. Furthermore, in the total number corresponding notification lottery, when the total number of granted points is smaller than when the total number of granted points is large, it is decided to report at a high rate, and at a high rate, the points that are closer to the granted point or the given points The notification point is determined so that the fact that it has been granted is notified. On the other hand, the smaller the total number of granted points, the higher the player's attention to whether or not the points have been notified. Therefore, at a stage where the player's attention level with respect to the point giving effect is high, the player can be given a sense of expectation and a sense of security corresponding to the given points at a high rate.

  (7-4) In the above-described embodiment, when one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won during RT1, the predetermined ratio is set regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. Therefore, a non-AT navigation lottery is performed, and when it is determined that the navigation effect is to be executed, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of the nine winning combinations is performed. For this reason, when controlled by RT1, it is possible to reduce the missed winning combination of nine sheets regardless of whether or not it is controlled by AT. As a result, the player was not able to control the AT because only a small number of points were given, or because it was controlled by the AT but ended in a short period because the number of navigation stocks decided was small. It is possible to reduce the discomfort that is held, and to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the interest of the game is extremely lowered when not controlled by the AT.

  (7-5) As shown in FIG. 19, when the notification promotion condition is satisfied, the number of navigation stocks is set so as to be more advantageous to the player than when the notification promotion condition is not satisfied. For this reason, even when only a small number of points are awarded, the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled by the AT by establishing the notification promotion condition, and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

  Further, the number of stocks set when the notification promotion condition is satisfied is added to the number of stocks set in the AT lottery. For this reason, the player can easily experience the advantage over the establishment of the notification promoting condition, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (8) As shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 16 (a), even when the point granting condition is satisfied, when it is determined not to be notified by the notice lottery, the point giving effect is not executed. For this reason, even when the point giving effect is not executed, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that points are actually given, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when a melon is won, a point granting condition is satisfied when a predetermined lottery is won. Even when the point granting condition is satisfied and points are awarded, when it is determined not to be notified by the notice lottery, the point giving effect is not executed. On the other hand, when a melon is won, a winning occurs regardless of the operation procedure. For this reason, even if the point granting effect is not executed when winning the melon and the impression is as if it was not won in the predetermined lottery, it is actually won in the predetermined lottery and points are given The player can have a sense of expectation for the game, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 16 (b), even when it is determined to be notified by the notification lottery, the fact that fewer points than the actually granted points are granted A point giving effect for informing the user can be executed. For this reason, even when only a small number of points are identified from the point granting effect, the player can have a sense of expectation that more points are actually given, improving the interest of the game Can be made.

  (10) As shown in FIG. 13, the point granting condition can be established in a high probability state that is continued until the probability state is exhausted to 30 or 50 games, or in a bonus that is controlled over a plurality of games. For this reason, the expectation with respect to being controlled to a high probability state can be given. In addition, it is possible to have a greater expectation for being controlled by the bonus. Furthermore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a state that continues for a plurality of games such as a high probability state and a bonus.

  (11) As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the fall replay, which is triggered by winning at RT1, is controlled by the fall replay depending on the type of reel to be stopped first. Since the case of winning and the case of avoiding the fall replay winning are distributed, it is possible to improve the fun when the reels are stopped.

  Further, since it is not necessary to consider the stop operation timing when avoiding the falling replay winning in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the player's burden caused when the reels are stopped.

  (12) In the bonus, the role that triggers the point grant condition is a melon or nine-card role as shown in FIG. 13B, whereas the role that triggers the notification promotion condition is as shown in FIG. And strawberry (1) and strawberry (2). In other words, in the bonus, by winning a plurality of winning combinations such as melon, nine winning combinations, strawberry (1), and strawberry (2), the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more and higher at a higher rate. Can give a sense of expectation to the game and improve the fun of the game.

  (13) When the strawberry (1) or strawberry (2), which is the trigger for establishing the notification promotion condition, is won, special reel control is performed for the middle reel 2C as shown in FIG. 8 (b). For this reason, the notification promoting condition is satisfied when a bonus that can be stopped only when special reel control is performed (symbol stop of symbol number 4 or 5 in the middle stage of the middle reel 2C) is achieved. The player can recognize that he / she has done. Therefore, during the bonus, it is possible to concentrate the player on the stopped appearance, and to add the fun of specifying success or failure of the notification promotion condition from the outcome.

  Further, when the probability state is a high probability state other than during the bonus and when strawberry (1) or strawberry (2) is won, the point granting condition is satisfied as shown in FIG. 13 (a). . Therefore, even when the player is in a high-probability state, the player can be concentrated at the point where he / she is stopped, and the point-scoring condition is established not only from the point-sparing effect but also from the point. The player can recognize that it has been granted.

  (14) As shown in FIG. 19, in the bonus, the strawberry (2) is won more than when the strawberry (1) is won alone and the notification promotion condition is satisfied without winning the strawberry (2). When the notification promoting condition is satisfied, a larger number of navigation stocks is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, on the condition that the strawberry (2) is won, special reel control for stopping the symbol of symbol number 4 on the middle stage of the middle reel 2C can be executed. Therefore, in the bonus, the symbol number 4 is stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 2C, so that the strawberry (2), which is more advantageous to the player than when the strawberry (1) is selected alone, is won and the notification promotion condition is established. The player can recognize that the game has been performed, and more fun can be added.

  (15-1) As shown in FIG. 17, the lottery conditions for the second AT lottery include the ratio of the number of navigation stocks determined to be 1 or more and the control to be controlled by the AT in the second AT lottery, and a larger number of navigation stocks. The ratio determined in the normal gaming state (the table in FIG. 18A) (see FIG. 18B) is the table that is referred to when being controlled at RT. The winning rate is set so that the bonus winning table in (d) and (d) is higher. That is, when the player is not controlled by the AT in the RT, the AT lottery is performed so as to be more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state. For this reason, even in non-ART, the player can advance the game while expecting to be controlled by the AT, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (15-2) In non-ART, as shown in FIG. 17, the lottery condition is satisfied every time 5 games are consumed until 30 games are consumed, and the second AT lottery is performed. That is, in non-ART, the lottery condition is satisfied and the second AT lottery is performed every time the game is consumed a predetermined number of times during non-AT. For this reason, in non-ART, the player can advance the game while expecting to be controlled by the AT step by step every time the game is digested a predetermined number of times, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  In addition, as shown in the table at the time of 30G digestion in FIG. 18 (d), in RT1 and RT2, it is controlled to AT in the second AT lottery by digesting 30 games without generating a fall replay prize during non-AT. It is decided to do so and it is always controlled by AT. For this reason, in non-ART, it is possible to add the fun of setting a final goal to digest 30 games without causing a fall replay winning and proceeding with the game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The conditions that must be controlled by AT depending on the number of non-AT digested games are that the number of games digested during non-AT reaches a predetermined number of games (30 games), and the winning is made during non-AT. The number of games avoiding the winning of the falling replay has reached a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games), and the number of games won for a specific winning combination during non-AT is determined (for example, 3 games) may be established.

  Also, as shown in the table at the time of digesting 5G to 30G in FIG. 18 (d), the ratio controlled by AT and the ratio determined by a larger number of navigation stocks increase stepwise according to game digestion. The second AT lottery is performed every time the game is consumed a predetermined number of times during non-AT. This makes it possible to vary the sense of expectation for being controlled by the AT in accordance with the number of games digested during the non-AT. That is, it is possible to increase the expectation for being controlled by the AT in proportion to the number of games that have been digested, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (16) The special event that triggers the transition to RT1 in the above-described embodiment is performed in accordance with the operation procedure of dropping the nine-piece combination when winning the nine-piece combination as described in FIG. The reel control is performed so that it is stopped on the winning line only when it is made. As a result, if a player loses a prize while winning a nine-piece winning combination, a medal to be paid out cannot be obtained due to the occurrence of a nine-piece winning combination. Since it is controlled to RT1 advantageous for the player, the disadvantage can be compensated.

  Even when nine winning combinations are won in the preparation mode, the navigation effect is not executed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the stop operation is performed according to the navigation effect and the winning combination of nine pieces can be won, but the RT is not controlled indefinitely.

  On the other hand, when 9 winning combinations are won in ART, a navigation effect is executed. As a result, by performing a stop operation according to the navigation effect, it is possible to obtain medals to be paid out in association with the occurrence of the nine winning combinations. In addition, since the outcome that can be stopped when the small role is missed is set as a trigger for transition from the preparation mode to RT1, there is no need to newly set a winning combination that triggers the transition, for example. The design burden in the machine development stage can be reduced.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in the bonus winning table in FIG. 18D, when a bonus is won in a non-ART, in addition to being controlled by the bonus, after the bonus has ended. Controlled by ART. For this reason, in non-ART, the expectation with respect to winning a bonus can be held more strongly, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in the tables of FIGS. 18B and 18C, when a bonus is won at ART, in addition to being controlled by the bonus, after the bonus has ended. Controlled by ART. For this reason, since it is controlled by AT continuously with a bonus in between, the interest of the game can be improved.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

  (1) In the embodiment described above, it is advantageous for the player by changing the ratio of acquiring the navigation stock and the ratio of acquiring the larger number of navigation stocks according to the gaming state when the AT lottery condition is satisfied. The example in which the AT lottery is performed so that the degree is different has been described. In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the degree of advantage for the player is changed by changing the AT activation timing according to the gaming state when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established has been described.

  However, the degree of advantage for the player is not limited to the gaming state when the AT lottery condition or the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established, for example, whether or not it is in AT, the number of games that have been consumed since the end of the previous bonus is a predetermined number ( For example, it may be different depending on other factors such as whether or not it is 500 games or more. Thereby, according to a plurality of factors, the degree of advantage for the player can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (2) As shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 11, and FIG. 18 of the above-described embodiment, the ratio of acquiring a larger number of navigation stocks is varied according to the gaming state when the AT lottery condition is satisfied. Thus, an example in which the player's degree of advantage is made different has been described. However, the player's degree of advantage is not limited to this, as long as the expected value for the period controlled by the AT varies depending on the gaming state when the AT lottery condition is satisfied. It is also possible to change the player's degree of advantage by making at least one of them different. Even in this case, according to the gaming state when the AT lottery conditions are satisfied, the sense of expectation of being controlled by the AT having a high degree of advantage for the player can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

In a slot machine that executes a predetermined end lottery (for example, a lottery for each game at the AT) in accordance with the end probability determined in advance in the AT and ends the control to the AT on condition that the winning is made in the end lottery Probability of determining the end probability and one end probability from a plurality of end probabilities ・ On condition that the number of times that the navigation effect is executed by winning a specific winning combination (for example, fall replay) at the AT has reached the specified number of times Ratio of determining the specified number of times in the slot machine that ends the control to the AT or one specified number from a plurality of specified times ・ Whether or not to perform the navigation effect when winning a specific winning combination (for example, fall replay) in the AT In the slot machine that executes a lottery and performs a navigation effect when it wins, the winning probability won by lottery or multiple Ratio of determining one winning probability from winning probability (3-1) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, depending on the gaming state when the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established, until the AT is triggered The example in which the AT activation timing is changed by changing the gaming state to be traced has been described. However, the AT activation timing is not limited to this, as long as the expected number of games to be consumed before being controlled by the AT is different depending on the gaming state when the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established, for example, The AT activation timing may be changed by changing at least one of the following points. Even in this case, the expected value of the number of games that need to be digested before being controlled by the AT can be changed according to the gaming state when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established. Can be improved.

-The regulation in the slot machine that starts control to the AT when the number of games digested after the establishment of Navistock acquisition reaches the prescribed number of games and is RT1 (when RT1 is started or during RT1) Number of games, or the ratio of determining one prescribed game number from a plurality of prescribed games ・ When the number of games digested in RT1 or RT2 reaches the prescribed number of games after the establishment of the Navistock acquisition opportunity, The specified number of games in the slot machine to start control, or the ratio for determining the specified number of games ・ After the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established, the number of games that have been digested in the normal gaming state reaches the specified number of games and at RT1 At some point (when RT1 is started or during RT1) the slot machine that starts control to AT The ratio of determining the number of specified games or one specified number of games from a plurality of specified games ・ Avoidance by avoiding winning of a specific winning combination (for example, fall replay) selected after the opportunity to acquire Navistock In the slot machine that controls the AT on the condition that the number of times reaches the determined number of times of arrival, the number of times of arrival until the start of the control to the AT or the ratio of determining one number of times of arrival from a plurality of times of arrival In the slot machine that controls the AT on the condition that the number of winnings won for a specific winning combination (for example, fall replay) after the establishment of the Navistock acquisition opportunity has reached the determined number of times, control to the AT The number of times of arrival until the start or the ratio of determining the number of times of arrival from a plurality of times of arrival (3-2) In the embodiment described above As shown in FIG. 20, when the AT activation timing is focused on the average number of games until the AT is controlled, the gaming state when the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established is the normal gaming state In the above example, the player is set to have the highest degree of advantage for the player, and lower in the order of the player in the order of RT1, RT2, and the preparation mode. However, the order of the degree of advantage of the AT activation timing is not limited to this, and a game that is digested until it is controlled by the AT depending on the type of gaming state when the Navistock acquisition opportunity is established when it is non-AT. As long as the expected values of numbers are different, any order may be used.

  For example, when the AT activation timing is focused on the average number of games until the AT is controlled, RT2 is the most advantageous for the player in that the game state when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established has the highest replay winning probability. So that the player has the highest degree of advantage for the player, and the replay winning probability has a low order of advantage for the player, that is, in the order of RT1, preparation mode, and normal gaming state. It may be set. Thereby, since the AT activation timing having a higher degree of advantage is set as the state is more advantageous, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for being controlled to the advantageous state.

  (4) In the embodiment described above, after the navigation stock is acquired in the non-AT, the AT is controlled when the AT activation timing is reached. The AT activation timing is set when a navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established. On the other hand, the navigation stock is determined by AT lottery executed when the AT lottery condition is satisfied. Therefore, after acquiring the navigation stock, the AT lottery condition may be satisfied again to acquire the navigation stock before reaching the AT activation timing. In this case, you may make it perform the process for controlling to AT as follows. Even in this case, the expected value of the number of games that need to be digested before being controlled by the AT can be changed according to the gaming state when the navigation stock acquisition opportunity is established. Can be improved.

-Control to AT when the AT trigger timing set when the Navistock acquisition trigger is first established-Depending on the gaming state when the latest Navistock acquisition trigger established until the AT trigger timing is reached Control to the AT when the AT trigger timing set in advance is reached.-The AT trigger timing set when the navigation stock acquisition trigger is first established, and the Navistock acquisition trigger established until the AT trigger timing is reached. Of the AT trigger timings set according to the gaming state of the time, control to the AT when it reaches the AT trigger timing where the expected number of games to be digested before being controlled by the AT is reached. After that, until the AT trigger timing is reached, the AT lottery conditions will not be met again, and Navistock will not be acquired. When the AT trigger timing (for example, the next game) is reached, the expected number of games to be digested before being controlled by the AT is less than when the AT is controlled. (5) In the embodiment described above The example in which the first AT lottery condition is established by winning a strawberry as a specific winning combination has been described. However, if the first AT lottery condition is established in relation to a specific winning combination, the first AT lottery condition may be established by winning a specific winning combination, and it is a condition that a specific winning combination is won. The combination of symbols that can be stopped on the winning line (chance) may be established by stopping on the winning line. Thereby, a player can be concentrated on the combination of symbols.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, in the notice lottery in S4 and S6 of FIG. 12, the degree of advantage for the player is lower than the given points set in S2, that is, points below the given points are determined as the notice points. An example to be described. However, if the notification points determined in the notification lottery in S4 and S6 of FIG. 12 are determined from points whose total number of notification points is not equal to or greater than the total number of granted points even after notification, S2 The player may be configured such that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than the grant points set in Step 1, that is, the points more than the grant points are determined as notification points.

  FIG. 22 is an example of a table used in the notification lottery, and is a diagram for explaining a table in which more points than the given points can be determined as notification points in the difference number compatible notification lottery.

  Also in the difference number corresponding notification lottery in this modification, with reference to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 22A, a lottery is performed as to whether or not points are notified according to the difference number. The difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 22A is the same as the table in FIG.

  When it is decided to notify with reference to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 22A, the granted points set in S2 with reference to the difference number correspondence table B in FIG. In accordance with the difference number, a lottery for determining the notification points is performed.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “0 to 1”, the total number of reporting points after reporting the current reporting point at a rate of 100% is given as the reporting point. It is determined that the post-notification difference number is “0”, which is the difference from the total number of granted points to which the given points are added. Specifically, the notification points are (difference number−difference number after notification + giving points). In this case, if the difference number is “1”, the notification point is determined as (1−0 + 1) = point “2”. In this way, more points than the given points are notified.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “2-3”, the post-notification difference number is determined to be “0” at a rate of 15%, and “1” at a rate of 25%. ”And“ 2 ”at a rate of 60%.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “4”, the post-notification difference number is determined to be “1” at a rate of 10% and is set to “2” at a rate of 20%. It is determined to be “3” at a rate of 30% and “4” at a rate of 40%.

  Hereinafter, similarly, the post-notification difference number is determined according to the distribution rate specified from the granted point and the difference number, and the notification point is determined by calculating (difference number−post-report difference number + grant point). The

  For example, when the granted point is “3” and the difference number is “3” and “1” is determined as the difference number after notification, (3-1 + 3) = point “5” is determined as the notification point. To be determined.

  As described above, when a lottery is performed using a table in which more points than the granted points can be determined as notification points, for example, even when the difference number becomes too large, the player is more likely than the granted points. By reporting a point with a high degree of advantage as a reporting point, the difference number can be reduced. For this reason, it is possible to easily improve the reliability of the total number of notification points.

  (7) In the industry where the slot machines in the above-described embodiments are distributed, inspection (type test) by a third party is required at the pre-shipment stage, and the predetermined standard is satisfied in the type test. There is a special situation that only the determined model is allowed to be shipped to the game hall. Further, in recent years, in order to prevent the shooting ability from being increased too much, it is required to be able to perform a test assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by a player. Yes.

  Therefore, in the slot machine in the above-described embodiment, in consideration of such special circumstances and needs, a test is performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. “Output means” for outputting “information that can be performed” may be further provided. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 23, the game control board, the production control board, and the input / output board will be described as an example of “output means”, and the recommended operation procedure information will be described as “the slot machine is shipped to the market and the player actually As an example of “information that can be tested on the assumption that a game is played”. FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing an example of a control circuit of a slot machine equipped with a test apparatus 1200 for performing a type test and an input / output board 1100 for inputting / outputting test information used for the test.

  The test information output from the slot machine 1 to the test apparatus 1200 includes, as shown in FIG. 23, winning status information for specifying the game start and winning status, and the rotational positions of the reel motors 32L to 32R (for example, Recommendations that are expected to be actually operated by the player in consideration of the rotational position information for specifying the step number of the predetermined position, the area number of the symbol located in the lower stage, etc., the presence or absence of navigation effects, etc. The recommended operation procedure information for specifying the operation procedure is included. Note that the test information output from the slot machine 1 to the test apparatus 1200 includes winning information for specifying that a winning has occurred and the type of the winning, payout information for specifying that a medal has been paid out, and the like. , Other information included.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the test information input from the test apparatus 1200 to the slot machine 1 includes game start information for starting a game such as setting a bet number and reel rotation for starting a game, reels, and the like. The game end information for ending the game such as stopping the game is included.

  The input / output board 1100 mounted on the slot machine 1 includes a connector 1101 for electrically connecting to the game control board 40, a connector 1102 for electrically connecting to the effect control board 90, and a test apparatus 1200. A connector 1103 for electrical connection is provided. The type test described above is performed by inputting / outputting various types of information in a state where the input / output board 100 and the test apparatus 1200 are connected by a connector. Hereinafter, the flow and operation of various information when the type test is performed will be specifically described.

  First, the test apparatus 1200 outputs game start information in order to start a game in the slot machine 1. The game start information is input to the game control board 40 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the main control part 41 of the game control board 40, the process for starting a game (betting number setting, lottery process, reel rotation process, etc. in the BET process) is performed.

  And the main control part 41 of the game control board 40 produces | generates and outputs winning condition information at the time of a game start. The corresponding selection status information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. As a result, the test apparatus 1200 can specify that the game has started and the winning situation.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 generates and outputs rotational position information according to the reel rotation. The rotational position information is information for specifying a step existing at a predetermined position among 168 steps of each of the reel motors 32L to 32R, for example, and is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, the current rotation position can be specified for each of the reels 2L to 2R.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 generates and outputs recommended operation procedure information according to the winning situation or the like. The recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, the recommended operation procedure can be specified.

  Based on the current rotation position of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the rotation position information, the test apparatus 1200 provides game end information for stopping each of the reels 2L to 2R in the recommended operation procedure specified from the recommended operation procedure information. Generate and output. The game end information is input to the game control board 40 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the main control part 41 of the game control board 40, each of the reels 2L to 2R is stopped according to the game end information, and a process (reel rotation process, winning determination process, payout process, etc.) for ending the game is performed. Do. Thereby, each of the reels 2L to 2R can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  As described above, information is repeatedly input / output between the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100, and the game can be automatically repeated. As a result, the type test for the slot machine 1 can be automatically performed.

  As described above, the recommended operation procedure may be information for enabling the test to be performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. For example, the recommended operation procedure is an operation procedure for deriving a symbol combination to be actually stopped by a player by a game effect (for example, a navigation effect or the like) for notifying information related to the winning situation. When the game effect for notifying the information related to is not performed, a predetermined operation procedure (a procedure for minimizing the small part missing, so-called DDT hitting method, KKK hitting method, etc.) may be used.

  Specifically, the recommended operation procedure is, for example, a normal replay in which a symbol combination to be actually stopped when a navigation effect at the time of falling replay is executed is simultaneously selected, so that the normal replay is derived. The operation procedure for Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, when the current rotation position of each of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the rotation position information becomes the position of each of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the recommended operation procedure information, the corresponding reel The game end information for stopping the game is output. As a result, each of the reels 2L to 2R can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure, and the normal replay winning selected in the slot machine 1 can be generated.

  As a result, in the test apparatus to which the recommended operation procedure information is input, the recommended operation procedure for deriving the symbol combination to be actually stopped by the player by the game effect informing the information related to the winning situation is specified. can do. As a result, the type test can be performed based on the results of operation according to the recommended operating procedure, so the test should be performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. Can do.

  In addition, the recommended operation procedure when the game effect that informs the information related to the winning situation is not performed is a predetermined operation procedure (in the case of including a predetermined small role that is missed by the operation procedure) It is also possible to use a procedure for minimizing missing, so-called DDT method, KKK method, etc. For example, it is conceivable that a player who has not recognized whether or not a bonus has been won usually performs a stop operation so that a predetermined small role can be won as much as possible. This is because it is possible to minimize the possibility of losing the selected small part that has been won. That is, the stop operation is performed so that the predetermined small role can be won, so that, for example, when the predetermined small role is won, it is more reliable when the predetermined small role is won. Can win a prize, and if you have not won a given small role and have won another small role (for example, a small role that has not been missed), you can pull in the selected small role, This is because the possibility of being missed can be minimized. Accordingly, for example, compared with an operation procedure in which a predetermined small role cannot be won, the possibility of losing a small role is reduced by performing a stop operation in an operation procedure for winning a predetermined small role. it can.

  Note that the recommended operation procedure when the game effect for notifying the information related to the winning situation is not performed may be an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting). This is because when the game effect is not performed, it is considered that the player can proceed with the game without pressing in consideration of speeding up the game. The recommended operation procedure information in this case is information that can specify the region numbers 0 to 20 for each of the reels 2L to 2R.

  Thereby, in the test apparatus to which the recommended operation procedure information is input, even when the game effect for notifying the information related to the winning situation is not performed, the symbol combination to be actually stopped by the player The recommended operation procedure for deriving can be identified. As a result, since the type test can be performed based on the result of operation according to the recommended operation procedure, it is not during the so-called AT assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. You can also test for time.

  Note that the recommended operation procedure information that is output when a game effect that informs the information related to the winning situation is not performed is a predetermined operation procedure (a procedure for minimizing a small part missing, so-called DDT batting method, KKK batting For example, the first information for specifying a method and the like and the second information for specifying an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting) may be output. As a result, the test apparatus 1200 can perform a test when a game effect that informs information related to the winning situation is not performed using the first information or the second information as necessary. It is possible to perform a test when a game effect for notifying information related to the winning situation is not performed in a state closer to the case where the game is played by the player.

  The sub-control unit 91 outputs, for example, a first strobe signal based on the internal winning command and the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, and outputs data for specifying the region number for the left reel 2L, The second strobe signal is output, data for specifying the region number for the middle reel 2C is output, and further, the third strobe signal is output, and the data for specifying the region number for the right reel 2R. To complete the output of the recommended operating procedure information. Thus, recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. On the test apparatus 1200 side, the position where each reel should be stopped can be specified from the recommended operation procedure information, and the game end information is output in consideration of the rotation position specified from the rotation position information. Each reel can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  When the recommended operation procedure includes the reel stop order, the sub control unit 91 outputs the first strobe signal based on the internal winning command and the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, for example. Data for specifying an area number for the first reel to be stopped is output, a second strobe signal is output, data for specifying an area number for the second reel to be stopped is output, and 3 is output, and data for specifying the region number for the third reel to be stopped is output, thereby completing the output of the recommended operation procedure information. Thus, recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. On the test apparatus 1200 side, in addition to the recommended operation procedure information, the reel stop order can be specified in addition to the position where each reel should be stopped, and the rotational position specified from the rotational position information is taken into consideration. The game end information can be output and each reel can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  Note that after the type test is completed, it is conceivable that an illegal act of inputting illegal information via the connector 1103 described above is performed. In order to avoid this, for example, the connector 1103 may be provided so as to be removable from the input / output board 1100, and the connector 1103 may be configured to be removable at the shipping stage. In the shipping stage, the input / output board 1100 may be shipped without being mounted. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts such as inputting unauthorized information.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, for example, when a winning operation is performed at a timing at which the type of the winning 9-sheet combination can be drawn with respect to the case where any of the 9-sheet winning combinations (1) to (9) is won, An example in which a control that increases the player's advantage in terms of generating 9 winning combinations and paying out 9 medals than when stopping at an operation timing that cannot be pulled in, or winning a fall replay When the stop operation is performed in the avoidance procedure for avoiding the falling replay winning according to the type of replay that has been won at the same time, for example, when the stop operation is performed in the avoidance procedure, the RT An example in which control is performed to increase the degree of advantage for the player in that the point is continued has been described. However, the control that increases the degree of advantage for the player may be, for example, the following control.

    (8-1) For example, in the case where different types of small roles with different medal payout numbers associated with winning a prize can be won simultaneously, operation is performed in a procedure different from a predetermined advantageous procedure according to the type of small winning combination. It is also possible to perform a control for winning a small role with a small medal payout number when the medals are accepted, and a control for winning a small role with a large medal payout number when an operation is accepted in an advantageous procedure. As a result, in a game in which small types of small medals with different medal payout numbers are simultaneously won, the game value that a player acquires when operated by an advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player increases in terms of increase in the number of players.

    (8-2) For example, in the preparation mode, even if a game state (for example, a special outcome is derived) that is disadvantageous to the player when winning one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) It is controlled to so-called disadvantage RT, such as a state that is not controlled by RT, a state where the replay winning probability is lower than RT, and a special outcome that can be derived when 9 roles (1) to (9) are missed is derived Then, when it is controlled to a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, RT1), when the number of navigation stock is 1 or more and the player is in the preparation mode, one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won In the slot machine, which is configured to execute a navigation effect according to the type of the nine-piece combination, and has a navigation stock number of 1 or more and executes the navigation effect according to the type when the nine-piece combination is won in the preparation mode The operation timing at which the winning 9-player combination is placed in a disadvantaged gaming state when the stop operation is performed at an operation timing that allows the winning 9-player combination to be drawn, and the winning 9-player combination cannot be pulled in When the stop operation is performed, it is possible to control the RT so that the 9-piece combination is missed and the 9-medal payout cannot be received, but the special outcome is derived and becomes an advantageous state for the player. As a result, when the number of Navi stocks is 1 or more and the degree of advantage in the game in which the nine-game combination is won in the preparation mode is not performed, the type of the selected nine-piece combination is stopped at an operation timing that cannot be drawn. It can be said that the player is more advantageous in that it is controlled by RT in the game after the game than when the winning combination is performed at the operation timing at which the nine types of winning combinations can be drawn.

  In addition, for example, the above-described normal replay is a single small role with one payout, and a fall replay is a specific small role with more than one number of medal payouts. In the case where a winning combination and BAR replay are won simultaneously in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment, and a specific small role winning can be avoided by a stop procedure according to the combination of simultaneous winnings, Advantageous procedure corresponding to a predetermined result when a winning of a specific small role occurs and RT ends when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the combination of simultaneous winning (see FIG. 8A) When the operation is accepted in the above, a winning of one small role may be generated and the RT may be maintained. Thus, apart from the degree of advantage in a game won for a specific small role during RT, the procedure when avoiding the specific small role winning is different from the procedure for avoiding the specific small role winning. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in that the RT is maintained without ending in the game after the game than when the game is operated.

    (8-3) For example, in a slot machine in which each of 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) and melon can be won simultaneously, when any of 9 winning combinations and melon are simultaneously won, When an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the combination of melon and melon, nine winning combinations are won at a predetermined non-advantage ratio (for example, 1/9), and the operation is accepted in the advantageous procedure Alternatively, control may be performed to win the melon at a predetermined advantageous rate (100%) higher than a predetermined non-advantageous rate. As a result, if any of the 9 winning combinations and melons are won at the same time, 9 medals will be obtained at a higher rate when operated by the advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. In terms of what can be done, it can be said that the degree of advantage for the player increases.

  Also, for example, in a slot machine in which each of the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) and melon can be won simultaneously, when any of the 9 winning combinations and melon are simultaneously won, When the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the combination of the above, a 9-piece combination with a predetermined non-advantage amount (9-medal payout) at a predetermined non-advantage rate (for example, 1/9) When a prize is awarded and an operation is accepted by an advantageous procedure, a melon with a predetermined advantageous amount (9-medal payout) is awarded at a predetermined advantageous rate (for example, 100%), and (advantageous rate) ) × (advantageous amount)> (non-advantageous ratio) × (non-advantageous amount). As a result, when any of the 9 winning combinations and melons are won at the same time, the amount of game value that the player earns when operated by an advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is high in that the expected value of becomes high.

  (9) In the total number corresponding notification lottery in the above-described embodiment, an example in which lottery is performed according to the total number of granted points updated in S10 of FIG. 12 has been described. However, the total number corresponding notification lottery may be configured such that the lottery is performed according to the total number of notification points updated in S9 of FIG. In the total number corresponding notification lottery in this case, the tables shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B are referred to, and whether or not to notify and whether or not to give the granted point accurately are notified so far. The probability is determined according to the total number of points. Further, in the total number corresponding notification lottery in this case, it is determined to notify at a high rate when the total number of notification points is smaller than when the total number of notification points is large, and at a high rate, depending on the grant points or the grant points The notification point is determined so as to notify that a close point has been given. On the other hand, the smaller the total number of notification points, the higher the degree of attention the player has on whether or not the points have been notified. Therefore, at a stage where the player's attention level with respect to the point giving effect is high, the player can be given a sense of expectation and a sense of security corresponding to the given points at a high rate.

  (10) In the first AT lottery in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the higher the normal number of granted points and the total number of bonus granted points, the higher the rate is controlled by the AT. In this example, the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by determining a larger number of navigation stocks. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player by being controlled by the AT at a high rate and being determined to have a higher number of navigation stocks at a high rate.

  In this case, even when the above-described point grant condition is not satisfied, the point grant effect may be executed as if a point was granted. Moreover, you may comprise so that a point provision effect may be performed as if the point provision conditions were satisfied and more points were provided than the point actually provided. Further, whether or not to execute such a point grant effect may be determined with a different probability depending on at least one of the grant points, the difference number, the total number of grant points, and the total number of notification points. .

  Thereby, even when the point granting effect is executed or when it is notified that a large number of points are given, the player is expected to expect that fewer points or points are not actually given. It is possible to hold the game, and it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the first AT lottery will be performed in an advantageous manner for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (11) In the embodiment described above, notification conditions (for example, FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, various ratios) with different degrees of advantage for the player are set according to the total number of granted points, and the first AT lottery is performed according to the notification conditions. An example of performing is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the AT is controlled over the length uniquely identified from the total number of granted points (the number of navigation stocks, the period for digesting the predetermined number of games, the period for executing the navigation effect a predetermined number of times, etc.). The first AT lottery may be performed.

  For example, in the first AT lottery, the number of navigation stocks may be set uniquely from the total number of granted points. More specifically, a predetermined number (for example, 1) is set as the number of navigation stock with respect to a predetermined number (for example, 2) for the total number of granted points. For example, when the total number of granted points is “6”, (6/2) "may be set.

  Further, as another example in the first AT lottery, the number of games that can be uniquely controlled by the AT may be set from the total number of granted points. More specifically, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is set as the number of games that can be controlled by the AT with respect to a predetermined number (for example, 1). For example, when the total number of granted points is “6”, You may comprise so that "60 (6x10)" may be set as the number of games which can be controlled. Even in the case of such a configuration, the same effect as described above is obtained.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the example in which the navigation stock is set when the notification promoting condition is satisfied has been described. However, when the notification promoting condition is satisfied, any process that is advantageous for the player regarding the AT control may be executed. For example, when the notification promotion condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of points (for example, 5 points) may be given, and one or more at a higher rate than when the tables shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are referred to. In addition, the first AT lottery may be performed with reference to a table in which the winning rate is set so that a larger number of navigation stocks is determined. In FIG. 10 and FIG. Points to be determined (for example, “6” in FIG. 10 or points whose total is “6” or more in relation to the total number of granted points) may be granted. According to such a configuration, even if the total number of points granted when the point granting condition is satisfied is the number of points with a relatively low degree of advantage for the player, the notification promotion condition is satisfied, The player can have a greater sense of expectation than the total number of points actually given for being controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (13) In the embodiment described above, with regard to the fall replay that triggers the termination of RT1, as shown in FIG. 8A, an example in which winning can be avoided when the stop order is a predetermined stop order. explained. In addition, for the 9-piece roles (1) to (9) in which the navigation effect is executed at a predetermined ratio even if it is non-ART, an example can be awarded when the stop operation timing is the predetermined stop operation timing Explained.

  However, the fall replay can avoid winnings on the condition that it is a predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination, as in the case of nine winning combinations (1) to (9). May be.

  For example, as a winning combination in which a navigation effect is executed at a predetermined ratio even if it is non-ART, 9 winning combinations (1) (configuration symbol: “Red 7-ANY-ANY”), 9 winning combinations (2) (configuration) Set the symbol: “White 7-ANY-ANY”), 9-piece role (3) (Composition symbol: “BAR-ANY-ANY”), and fall replay as a winning combination that will trigger the preparation mode and RT (1) (Composition pattern: “white strawberry / black strawberry-ANY-red 7), tumble replay (2) (composition pattern:“ white strawberry / black strawberry—ANY-white 7 ”, tumble replay (3) (composition pattern:“ White strawberry / black strawberry-ANY-BAR) may be set.

  In this case, with respect to the nine winning combinations (1) to (3), the winning is made on condition that an operation for stopping the left reel 2L is performed at a predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination. Can do. For example, when the 9-piece combination (1) is won, the 9-piece combination (1) is placed on the left reel 2L on the condition that “Red 7” is stopped at a timing that allows the drawing to be made on the winning line. You can win a prize.

  In addition, for the fall replays (1) to (3), it is possible to avoid winning a prize on condition that an operation for stopping the right reel 2R is performed at a predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination. it can. For example, when the fall replay (1) is won, the right reel 2R receives the red fall 7 on the condition that “red 7” is stopped at a timing that cannot be drawn into the pay line. Can be avoided.

  As a result, even when the left reel 2L is erroneously stopped when the winning of the fall replay is avoided, the right reel 2R is stopped at a predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination. By performing the operation, it is possible to avoid winning a fall replay. Further, in the case of winning nine winning combinations, even if the right reel 2R is erroneously stopped, an operation for stopping the left reel 2L at a predetermined stop operation timing corresponding to the type of winning combination is performed. By performing, it is possible to win nine winning combinations.

  In addition, as described above, when the operation procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning and the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) winning is set to the predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination, the falling replay is related. Both the navigation effect and the navigation effect related to the nine-piece role include, for example, red information that recalls “red” corresponding to the “red 7” symbol, and white information that recalls “white” corresponding to the “white 7” symbol. , Using information notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display 51, a predetermined lamp, a predetermined 7-segment display, etc.) that can specify the black information reminiscent of “black” corresponding to the “BAR” symbol. You may comprise so that it may be performed by the common alerting | reporting aspect by alert | reporting any of red information, white information, and black information.

  The red information is, for example, an effect of displaying a red character mainly using red on the liquid crystal display 51, or an effect of lighting a lamp capable of specifying red (for example, lighting a lamp provided corresponding to red) Alternatively, the lighting color may be red). Similarly, white information is an effect of displaying a white character mainly using white color or an effect of lighting a lamp capable of specifying white (for example, lighting a lamp provided corresponding to white or lighting color) The black information is an effect of displaying a black character mainly using black or an effect of lighting a lamp capable of specifying black (for example, provided for black). The lamp may be turned on or the lighting color may be black.

  Specifically, for example, when the falling replay (1) is won, the falling replay (1) is performed on the condition that the red reel 2R is stopped at a timing at which it is not possible to draw “red 7” into the winning line. Since the “Red 7” can be avoided, the black information that reminds of “Black” corresponding to the “BAR” symbol arranged at the timing where the “Red 7” cannot be drawn into the winning line is informed. You may perform a navigation effect by alert | reporting by a means. Similarly, red information reminiscent of “red” corresponding to the “red 7” symbol when winning the fall replay (2), and “white 7” symbol when winning the falling replay (3) The navigation effect may be executed by notifying white information reminiscent of “white” to be performed by the information notification means. In addition, when the nine-piece combination (1) is won, the nine-piece combination (1) is awarded on the condition that the left reel 2L is stopped at a timing at which “red 7” can be drawn into the winning line. Therefore, the navigation effect may be executed by notifying red information reminiscent of “red” corresponding to the “red 7” symbol by the notifying means. Similarly, white information that recalls “white” corresponding to the “white 7” symbol when winning nine (2) roles, and “BAR” symbol when winning nine (3) symbols. The navigation effect may be executed by notifying the black information reminiscent of the corresponding “black” by the information notification means.

  Thereby, it is not necessary to specify whether the information regarding the color notified by the navigation effect is information for avoiding the fall replay or information for winning the nine-piece roles (1) to (9). By stopping the reels 2L to 2R according to the information related to the color notified in a common notification mode by the information notification means, it is possible to avoid the falling replay winning and to win the winning nine-piece combination.

  In addition, as for the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9), as in the case of the fall replay, the winning combination can be won on the condition that the winning combination is in accordance with the type of combination of the winning combinations. May be. For example, when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop order corresponding to the combination of winning combinations, the corresponding nine winning combinations can be won, and when a stop operation other than the predetermined stop order is performed Reel control may be performed so that nine winning combinations cannot be won.

  This eliminates the need for so-called pressing in both cases of avoiding the falling replay winning and winning the nine-piece winning combination, thereby reducing the player's burden associated with the stop operation.

  In addition, as described above, when the operation procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning and the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) winning is set in a predetermined stop order according to the type of the winning combination, the navigation related to the falling replay is performed. Both the effect and the navigation effect relating to the 9-piece combination are, for example, information notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display 51, a predetermined lamp, a predetermined 7-segment display, etc.) for notifying the stop order information that recalls the stop order. ) May be configured to be executed in a common notification mode by notifying the stop order.

  The stop order information corresponds to, for example, an effect of displaying the stop order on the liquid crystal display 51 (for example, a message such as “left” is displayed when the first reel to be stopped is the left reel 2L), and each of the reels 2L to 2R. The effect of lighting the lamp in such a manner that the stop order can be specified (for example, the lamp corresponding to the left reel 2L is lit when the first reel to be stopped is the left reel 2L) may be used.

  Thereby, it is not necessary to specify whether the stop order information notified by the navigation effect is information for avoiding the fall replay or information for winning the 9-piece combination (1) to (9). By stopping the reels 2L to 2R according to the stop order information notified in a common notification mode by the information notification means, it is possible to avoid the falling replay winning and to win the winning nine-piece combination.

  (14) In the embodiment described above, whether or not to execute a navigation effect that can identify the type of the winning 9-sheet combination during non-ART (excluding RT2), every time the 9-sheet combination is won The example to be determined has been described. However, during non-ART, whether or not to execute a navigation effect that can identify the type of the winning 9-sheet combination is determined when the 9-port combination is won in the non-ART when controlled by the non-ART. It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute. In this case, in the non-ART determined to execute the navigation effect, the navigation effect corresponding to the type of the 9 winning combination is always executed when winning the 9 winning combination. Thereby, every time it is controlled to non-ART, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for being controlled to non-ART in which a nine-stage navigation effect is executed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the gaming state in which the navigation effect is executed at the time of winning nine winning combinations is RT1 regardless of whether or not the AT is controlled. However, for example, if the special event that triggers the transition to RT is not the event that is derived when the nine-card combination is missed, even in the preparation mode, the navigation is performed when the nine-card combination is selected regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. You may comprise so that an effect may be performed. Thereby, the discomfort with respect to not being controlled by AT can be reduced further.

  (15) In the point-related processing in the above-described embodiment, even if the total number of granted points updated in S10 is an upper limit, if the total number of notification points updated in S9 is not the upper limit, S3 and subsequent steps You may comprise so that a process may be performed. Thereby, even after the total number of granted points has reached the upper limit, when the total number of notification points has not reached the upper limit, the same control as before the total number of given points has reached the upper limit is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the point giving effect is not executed after the total number of given points reaches the upper limit. Note that when the total number of notification points reaches the upper limit, the point-related processing may not be executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being performed.

  (16) Because the navigation effects relating to the fall replay, promotion replay (1) to (3), and nine-piece combination (1) to (9) in the embodiment described above specify the operation procedure in the liquid crystal display 51. The example performed by the common alerting | reporting aspect by displaying this message was demonstrated. However, the configuration for executing the navigation effect is any one that can execute the predetermined effect in a common notification mode, such as a predetermined lamp mounted on the slot machine or a predetermined 7-segment display. There may be.

  (17) A fall replay, which is a re-gamer, is set as a winning combination that triggers the termination of RT1 in the above-described embodiment, and a navigation effect is executed at a predetermined rate even for non-ART (except RT2). The example in which the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) are set as the winning combinations. However, the winning combination that triggers the termination of RT1 is not limited to the re-playing combination, but may be a predetermined small combination, a single bonus that controls the next game as a bonus by winning. In addition, the winning combination in which the navigation effect is executed at a predetermined rate even if it is non-ART (excluding RT2) is not limited to a small combination, but may be a predetermined re-playing combination, a single bonus, or the like. In addition, as a winning combination that becomes a trigger for the transition to RT2, promotion replays (1) to (3) have been described as examples. However, the winning combination is not limited to the replaying combination, and the next one game is played by a predetermined small combination and winning. It may be a single bonus that is controlled as a bonus.

  (18) In the first AT lottery in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the AT lottery is performed so as to be more advantageous for the player as the total number of normal granted points or the total number of bonus points is increased has been described. Instead, when the total number of granted points is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, “0”), the AT lottery is performed so as to be more advantageous to the player than when the total number of granted points is larger than the predetermined number. It may be configured. Specifically, when the total number of granted points is “0”, the AT lottery is performed at the same winning rate as when the total number of granted points is “5” or “10” which is the upper limit. May be. Thereby, the player can also have a sense of expectation that the total number of granted points is equal to or less than the predetermined number, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (19) A process for clearing (for example, “0”) the number of navigation stock when the bonus is won in a state where the number of navigation stock remains may be performed. May be performed, a process of subtracting a predetermined number may be performed, a process of adding and adding a predetermined number may be performed, and which process is to be performed every time the bonus is won It may be determined and the determined processing is performed. Thereby, the variation when a bonus is won in a state where the number of navigation stocks remains is increased, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the number of awarded points is not subtracted has been described. However, a predetermined number is subtracted from the number of awarded points on condition that a predetermined subtraction condition (for example, winning a specific winning combination) is won. You may comprise. In this case, the number of points actually subtracted may be notified as the number of subtracted points, or the number of points larger than the number of points actually subtracted may be notified. As for whether to notify the number of points actually subtracted or the number of points greater than the number of points actually subtracted, at least one of grant points, difference numbers, grant points, report points Accordingly, it may be configured to determine with different probabilities. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of tension to the point being subtracted even after the point is awarded, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (21) In the first AT lottery and the second AT lottery in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the number of navigation stocks corresponding to the expected value for the length controlled by the AT has been described. However, in the 1st AT lottery and the 2nd AT lottery, not only the number of navigation stocks but also the probability (intrusion rate) controlled by the AT and a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) are used and the AT is controlled again after the AT is finished. You may comprise so that the probability (continuation rate) to do may be determined. In this case, it is determined whether or not the AT is controlled according to the rush rate determined in the AT lottery, and the AT is controlled according to the continuation rate determined in the AT lottery when the predetermined number of games are digested and the AT is completed. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the AT is continued until a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) are consumed when controlled by the AT has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that the said AT may be continued until the frequency | count that a navigation effect was performed reaches | attains predetermined number (for example, 10 times etc.).

  (22) An example in which a predetermined number of points are notified 100% when winning a strawberry (1) and a strawberry (2) that satisfy the 100% point grant condition by winning when they are in a high probability state has been described. However, not limited to this, a predetermined number of points are notified by winning and winning, or by appearing a winning that is stopped only when winning the strawberry shown in FIG. 8 (b), If you win but don't win, you may be notified according to the notification lottery.

  (23) In the embodiment described above, an example in which the number of navigation stocks is consumed to control the AT while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times has been described. However, the navigation stock number is not limited to this, and the navigation effect of the fall replay You may make it consume 1 whenever it performs. The number of navigation stocks may be any value as long as it is a value that specifies the period of time controlled by the AT at RT.

  (24) In the embodiment described above, the same table (see FIG. 18 (d)) is used for RT1 and RT2 in the second AT lottery executed by game digestion a predetermined number of times during non-ART. Although the example to be used has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and tables having different degrees of advantage between RT1 and RT2, that is, tables having different rates determined by AT winning probability and a larger number of navigation stocks. It may be used to perform the second AT lottery. As a result, if the second AT lottery that is more advantageous in the case of RT1 than in the case of RT2 is performed, the probability of normal replay winning is better than that in the case of RT1 being RT2. The loss due to the low can be compensated. In addition, when the second AT lottery that is more advantageous when RT2 is performed than when RT1 is performed, the degree of advantage during RT2 can be increased.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, in the second AT lottery executed by a predetermined number of game digests, the ratio controlled by the AT and the ratio determined by a larger number of navigation stocks are stepwise according to the game digestion. The example which becomes high was demonstrated. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the game will be digested as many times as possible without winning a fall replay during non-AT, and the interest of the game can be improved. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second AT lottery executed by game digestion a predetermined number of times, the ratio controlled by AT or the ratio determined by a larger number of navigation stocks becomes lower step by step according to game digestion. It may be. As a result, a sense of expectation for winning an AT at the earliest possible stage during non-AT can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (26) In the embodiment described above, RT1 may be terminated by digesting a prescribed game (for example, 100 games). Further, the RT1 may be controlled so that the degree of advantage (replay winning rate, prescribed number of games) varies depending on the type of special event. Thereby, variation of RT1 can be made abundant and the interest of a game can be improved.

  (27) In the embodiment described above, an example in which the reel control for stopping the special game on the winning line is performed only when the 9-card combination is missed regardless of the game state is won. did. However, the reel control for stopping the special game at the winning line is configured to be performed only when the 9-card combination is missed when the 9-card combination is won and the game state is the preparation mode or RT2. May be. As a result, in spite of the special game being stopped in the normal gaming state, the RT1 is not controlled, so that it is possible to prevent inconveniences that cause confusion for the player.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the special game is not controlled by the RT1 even when the special game is stopped in the normal game state has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may be controlled by RT1 with low probability. In addition, RT1 is only performed when a special outcome (for example, red 7-blank (1) -blank (1) among the special outcomes shown in FIG. 5B) is stopped in the normal gaming state. You may comprise so that it may be controlled by. This makes it possible for the player to have a sense of expectation that the normal gaming state will be controlled to RT1 regardless of the number of games consumed.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, in the AT lottery, the number of special navigation stocks controlled by the AT until the bonus is won may be determined. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning the special Navistock number. In this case, the special navigation stock number may be configured to win according to a proportion corresponding to the gaming state when the AT lottery condition is satisfied. For example, when the bonus is won in the preparation mode, the AT lottery may be won with higher probability than when the bonus is won in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of special navigation stocks may be won with a higher probability in the AT lottery when a bonus is won in the preparation mode than when a bonus is won in RT. Thereby, it is possible to add a premier to winning a bonus in the preparation mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (29) In FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period, (a) in a slot machine controlled by AT on condition that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more The ratio determined to be controlled by AT is exemplified. However, as a notification condition related to whether or not to start a notification period, (a) a slot machine that controls the AT on the condition that the number of games digested in the non-AT in RT has reached a predetermined number of reached games The ratio of determining the number of games reached until the start of control to the AT in (1), (c) Condition that the number of avoidances that avoided winning of the falling replay won in the non-AT in RT reached the determined number of arrivals Or a ratio for determining the number of times to reach control in the slot machine that is controlled during the notification period.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the case of (a) above, by using a table that determines that AT is controlled at a higher rate as the total number of granted points is larger (the degree of advantage for the player is higher), the player An example of AT lottery so as to be advantageous to the above has been described. However, in the case of (b) above, similarly, a table in which the winning rate is set so that the higher the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the smaller the number of reached games is determined at a higher rate. It may be configured to perform an AT lottery so as to be advantageous for the player. Similarly, in the case of (c), a table is used in which the winning rate is set so that the greater the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the smaller the number of arrivals is determined at a higher rate. Thus, the AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  In FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 of the above-described embodiment, as the notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period, (D) the number of games digested in AT reaches the number of end games according to the number of navigation stocks acquired. The ratio of determining the number of navigation stocks in the slot machine that ends the control to the AT on condition that it has been, that is, the ratio of determining the number of finished games is illustrated. However, as a notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period, (e) a predetermined end lottery is executed in accordance with the end probability determined in advance in the AT, and the control to the AT is performed on the condition that the end lottery is won The ratio at which the end probability is determined in the slot machine that finishes, (f) The slot machine that finishes the control to the AT on condition that the number of times that the navigation effect has been executed by winning the fall replay at the AT has reached the specified number The ratio for determining the prescribed number of times may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the case of (d) above, the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the higher the number of navigation stocks, that is, the higher the number of finished games is determined at a higher rate. An example in which the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by using the table to be described has been described. However, in the case of the above (e), similarly, a table in which the winning rate is set so that the higher the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player) is, the higher the lower end probability is determined. Thus, the AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player. Similarly, in the case of (f), a table is used in which the winning rate is set so that the greater the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the higher the specified number of times is determined. Thus, the AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  The notification conditions include, for example, a ratio for determining a winning probability in a slot machine that draws whether or not a navigation effect is to be executed at the time of winning a fall replay at (ki) AT, and executes a navigation effect when winning. It may be. Similarly, in the case of (ki) above, by using a table in which the winning rate is set so that the higher the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the higher the winning probability is determined at a higher rate. , AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the notification condition may be any of the above (A) to (K), or may be selectively combined among the above (A) to (K). Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (A) to (K) or a combination of (A) to (K), the same effect as the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

  (30) As shown in (29) above, as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period, at least (b) the number of games digested in non-AT in RT is a predetermined number of reached games The ratio of determining the number of games reached until the start of AT control in the slot machine controlled by AT under the condition that it has been reached, (c) Number of avoidance times that avoided winning of the fall replay won in non-AT in RT In the slot machine that adopts the ratio of determining the number of arrivals until the control to the AT is started in the slot machine that is controlled during the notification period on condition that the determined number of arrivals has been reached, the control is performed during the notification period. In the non-AT in RT until it is made, it is possible to specify the type of winning combination that was won at the fall replay winning Means for controlling the non-period notification possible period for executing the bi-effect, and means for executing a navigation effect that makes it possible to specify the type of winning combination that was won at the time of the fall replay on the condition that it is a non-period notification possible period May be provided. In this case, as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period, it is further provided that the number of games digested in the non-period notification possible period has reached a predetermined number of out-of-period end games. As a ratio of determining the end-of-period end game in the slot machine that ends the control to the out-of-period notification possible period, (k) a predetermined out-of-period end lottery according to a predetermined out-of-period end probability in the out-of-period notification possible period The ratio of determining the out-of-period end probability in the slot machine that finishes the control to the out-of-period notification possible period on condition that the lottery is won in the out-of-period end lottery. The control for the out-of-period notification period is terminated on condition that the number of times that the replay is won and the navigation effect is executed reaches the prescribed number of times outside the period. Percentage that determines periods outside predetermined number of times in the slot machine, or the like may be used.

  In the case of (c) above, the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the more advantageous for the player by using a table that determines a higher number of out-of-period end games. As described above, an AT lottery including a lottery related to an out-of-period notification possible period may be configured. In the case of (K), the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the more advantageous it is for the player by using a table for determining a lower out-of-period end probability at a higher rate. In addition, an AT lottery including a lottery related to an out-of-period notification possible period may be configured. In the case of the above (co), the period is set such that the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player) is, the more advantageous the player can be by using a table that determines the higher number of out-of-period prescribed times. You may comprise so that AT lottery including the lottery regarding an outside alerting | reporting period may be carried out.

  In addition, for example, the notification condition is determined by lottery whether or not the navigation effect is executed at the time of winning the fall replay in the (sa) outside notification possible period, and the winning probability is determined in the slot machine that executes the navigation effect when winning. It may be the ratio to do. Similarly, in the case of (sa), the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the more advantageous to the player by using a table for determining a higher winning probability at a higher rate. You may comprise so that AT lottery including the lottery regarding the period which can be notified outside a period is included.

  In addition, the notification conditions in the slot machine may be any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa), and the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku). It may be one that is selectively combined among (s). Even if the notification condition is any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa) or selectively combined, other than the notification period in the period controlled to the advantageous state Since the notification conditions are set so as to be more advantageous to the player than in the normal state, the player can proceed with the game with expectation and improve the interest of the game. it can.

  (31) In FIG. 18 of the above-described embodiment, as a notification condition related to whether or not to start a notification period, (a) the AT is controlled on the condition that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more. The ratio of determining to control to AT in the slot machine is illustrated. However, as notification conditions related to whether or not to start the notification period, (b) Control by the AT on the condition that the number of games digested in the non-AT in the preparation mode or RT has reached a predetermined number of reached games The rate at which the number of games reached until the start of AT control in the slot machine to be played is determined. It may be a ratio that determines the number of times to reach the AT until the control to the AT is started in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on the condition that it has been reached.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the case of (a), in the non-ART, the table is determined to control to AT at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state or the preparation mode (FIG. 18A). The example in which the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by using the table (1) and the table (d) is described. However, in the case of (i) above, similarly, in non-ART, a table in which the winning rate is set so that a smaller number of reached games is determined at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state or the preparation mode. By using the AT, an AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player. Similarly, in the case of (c), in a non-ART, by using a table in which a winning rate is set so that a smaller number of times of arrival is determined at a higher rate than in a normal gaming state. The AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  In FIG. 18 of the above-described embodiment, as the notification condition related to the period controlled in the notification period, (d) the fact that the number of games digested in AT has reached the number of finished games corresponding to the number of acquired navigation stocks. As a condition, the ratio of determining the number of navigation stocks in the slot machine that ends the control to the AT, that is, the ratio of determining the number of finished games is illustrated. However, as a notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period, (e) a predetermined end lottery is executed in accordance with the end probability determined in advance in the AT, and the control to the AT is performed on the condition that the end lottery is won The ratio at which the end probability is determined in the slot machine that finishes, (f) The slot machine that finishes the control to the AT on condition that the number of times that the navigation effect has been executed by winning the fall replay at the AT has reached the specified number The ratio for determining the prescribed number of times may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the case of (d) above, in non-ART, a higher number of navigation stocks, that is, a larger number of finished games, at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state or the preparation mode. The example in which AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by using the table to be determined (see the table in FIG. 18A and the table at the time of 30G digestion and the bonus winning time in FIG. 18D) has been described. . However, in the case of the above (e), similarly, in non-ART, a table in which the winning rate is set so that a lower end probability is determined at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state or the preparation mode. It may be configured to perform an AT lottery so as to be advantageous for the player. Similarly, in the case of (f), in non-ART, a table in which a winning rate is set so that a higher number of prescribed times is determined at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state or the preparation mode. It may be configured to perform an AT lottery so as to be advantageous for the player.

  The notification conditions include, for example, a ratio for determining a winning probability in a slot machine that draws whether or not a navigation effect is to be executed at the time of winning a fall replay at (ki) AT, and executes a navigation effect when winning. It may be. Similarly, in the case of (ki), in non-ART, use a table in which the winning rate is set so that a higher winning probability is determined at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state or the preparation mode. Thus, the AT lottery may be configured so as to be advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the notification condition may be any of the above (A) to (K), or may be selectively combined among the above (A) to (K). Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (A) to (K) or a combination of (A) to (K), the same effect as the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

  (32) As shown in (31) above, at least (a) the number of games digested in the non-AT in the preparation mode or RT is reached as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period. Percentage of determining the number of games reached until the start of AT control in a slot machine controlled by AT on condition that the number of games has been reached, (c) Winning a fall replay won in non-AT in preparation mode or RT In a slot machine that adopts a ratio for determining the number of times to reach control at the AT in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on the condition that the number of times of avoidance that has been avoided has reached the determined number of arrivals In the preparation mode until controlled during the notification period or in non-AT in RT A means for performing a navigation effect that enables identification of the type of replay that has been won at the time of winning, and a control of the replay that has been won at the time of winning the fall replay on condition that it is a period that can be notified outside the period. And a means for executing a navigation effect that makes it possible to specify the type. In this case, as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period, it is further provided that the number of games digested in the non-period notification possible period has reached a predetermined number of out-of-period end games. As a ratio of determining the end-of-period end game in the slot machine that ends the control to the out-of-period notification possible period, (k) a predetermined out-of-period end lottery according to a predetermined out-of-period end probability in the out-of-period notification possible period The ratio of determining the out-of-period end probability in the slot machine that finishes the control to the out-of-period notification possible period on condition that the lottery is won in the out-of-period end lottery. The control for the out-of-period notification period is terminated on condition that the number of times that the replay is won and the navigation effect is executed reaches the prescribed number of times outside the period. Percentage that determines periods outside predetermined number of times in the slot machine, or the like may be used.

  In the case of (c) above, in the non-ART, it is advantageous for the player by using a table for determining a higher number of out-of-period end games at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state or the preparation mode. As such, the AT lottery including the lottery related to the out-of-period notification possible period may be configured. In the case of the above (K), in the non-ART, it is advantageous for the player by using a table for determining a lower out-of-period end probability at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state or the preparation mode. As described above, an AT lottery including a lottery related to an out-of-period notification possible period may be configured. In the case of (v) above, in non-ART, it is advantageous for the player by using a table that determines a higher number of out-of-period prescribed times at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state or the preparation mode. You may comprise so that AT lottery including the lottery regarding the period which can be notified outside a period is included.

  In addition, for example, the notification condition is determined by lottery whether or not the navigation effect is executed at the time of winning the fall replay in the (sa) outside notification possible period, and the winning probability is determined in the slot machine that executes the navigation effect when winning. It may be the ratio to do. Similarly, in the case of (S), in non-ART, it is advantageous for the player to use a table for determining a higher winning probability at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state or the preparation mode. In addition, an AT lottery including a lottery related to an out-of-period notification possible period may be configured.

  In addition, the notification conditions in the slot machine may be any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa), and the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku). It may be one that is selectively combined among (s). Even if the notification condition is any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa) or selectively combined, other than the notification period in the period controlled to the advantageous state Since the notification conditions are set so as to be more advantageous to the player than in the normal state, the player can proceed with the game with expectation and improve the interest of the game. it can.

  (33) In the embodiment described above, it may be configured to be controlled in the preparation mode or RT depending on whether it is a big bonus or a regular bonus. Further, even in the preparation mode, it may be configured such that when a fall replay is won with a predetermined probability and the fall replay is won, the game state is controlled to the normal gaming state. In this case, for example, when the big bonus (1) ends, the state is controlled to be more advantageous than the preparation mode controlled when the big bonus (2) ends (for example, the winning rate of the fall replay is low). You may comprise. Also, RT1 controlled from the preparation mode controlled when the big bonus (1) ends is more advantageous than the RT1 controlled from the preparation mode controlled when the big bonus (2) ends (for example, It may be configured to be controlled such that a normal replay winning rate is high). In this case, the combination of bonuses that trigger the control to the preparation mode or RT may be composed of different symbols for each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. For example, the big bonus (1) may be “red 7-grape-melon”, the big bonus (2) may be “grape-white 7-BAR”, and the regular bonus may be “melon-strawberry-watermelon”. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which bonus is won when a bonus is won. As a result, it can be difficult to understand which type of RT is controlled.

  Further, in such a configuration, the bonus effect may be such that the player cannot specify the type of bonus being controlled by performing the same content regardless of the type of bonus. This makes it difficult for the player to identify the type of bonus from the combination of symbols at the end of the game, and makes it difficult for the player to notice which type of bonus is being controlled. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the preparation mode and RT type to be controlled after the bonus ends.

  Further, in the case of such a configuration, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is made larger than the area of the see-through window 3 of the variable display device 2 and close to the height of the player's line of sight. You may install in the position which is easier to visually recognize than the window 3. FIG. Then, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, a virtual reel for scrolling the symbols in accordance with the display state of the variable display device 2 is displayed, and the effect symbols corresponding to the display results of the variable display device 2 are displayed in a variable manner. You may comprise so that it may display on the winning line of the virtual reel to make. Specifically, when a combination of grapes is derived in the variable display device 2, “grape-grape-grape” may be stopped and displayed on the winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51. As a result, the player can proceed with the game by viewing the variable reels 2 by displaying the virtual reels. In such a slot machine, when any of the bonuses that trigger the above-described preparation mode or RT control is won, the winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed regardless of the type of bonus that has been won. You may comprise so that common "7-7-7" may be stopped and displayed. This makes it difficult for a player who visually recognizes the liquid crystal display 51 to proceed with the game and to determine which type of bonus has been won. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which kind of preparation mode or RT is controlled.

  Also, RT2, which is advantageous to the player in the above-described embodiment, is ended by using a predetermined number of games or winning a big bonus or a regular bonus (by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus) You may comprise so that it does not complete | finish. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of loss due to the fact that RT2 is ended because the big bonus or regular bonus has been won before the predetermined number of games is consumed. . Also, since the bonus winning flag is carried over until the next game is won, it is possible to win the bonus that was won during the end of RT2 by reaching the predetermined number of games. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus at the end of RT2.

  The above-mentioned RT2 replay winning probability is an RT that is likely to receive fewer medals, that is, an RT in which the expected number of medals acquired per game is smaller than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets. It may be set as follows. The expected value of the number of medals acquired per game is, for example, the number of medals acquired when a game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 times, 100,000 times) in a certain gaming state. The value (theoretical value) divided by the number of times the number of winning is subtracted. In the case of such a configuration, when it is further controlled by the AT and becomes ART, the number of medals to be won per game is awarded by not winning the winning small role according to the navigation effect. The expected value may be made larger than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, and the number of medals owned by the player may be increased.

  (34) In the slot machine in the embodiment described above, the special combination and the small combination may be won simultaneously. Further, the combination of the special combination and the small combination that are won simultaneously may be as follows. Here, bonus (A) and bonus (B) are illustrated as special roles, and each of bonus (A) and (B) is a predetermined orange (combination of constituent symbols: orange-orange-orange) or plum. In the internal lottery, one of 15 small payouts such as (combination of structural symbols: plum-plum-plum) and one single payout such as 1 (1) or 1 (2) will be selected at the same time. An example will be described in which a big bonus and a small combination that are read out as a combination and are simultaneously read out can be won in duplicate. The combinations that are read out as the lottery target are orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 ( 2) Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are included. The bonus (A) and bonus (B) may be the following combinations. For example, the bonus (A) may be the big bonus (1) in the above-described embodiment, and the bonus (B) may be the big bonus (2) in the above-described embodiment.

  These bonuses (A), bonus (B), orange, plum, 1 (1), 1 (2), each symbol (combination of symbols) is 5 frames in each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. In principle, combinations that cannot be awarded unless the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated at an appropriate timing are set.

  Further, the bonus (A), the orange that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (A), and the symbols (combination of symbols) that constitute each of the combinations of the symbols (1) are the maximum drawing range in a predetermined reel. Arranged across frames. As a result, the bonus (A), the orange that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (A), and the combination of each one (1) are configured so that there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  Further, a bonus (B), a plum that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (B), and a symbol (a combination of symbols) that constitutes each role (2) are the maximum drawing range in a predetermined reel. Arranged across frames. As a result, the bonus (B), the plum that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (B), and the combination of one (2) are configured such that there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  In addition, the orange (one) (1), the plum, and the symbols (combination of symbols) that make up each of the symbols (2) are arranged beyond the maximum drawing range of 4 frames on a given reel. Therefore, there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  The slot machine including such bonus (A), bonus (B), orange, plum, 1 (1), 1 (2) as a winning combination further comprises the following configuration. May be.

  (34-1) In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific combination that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when no combination is won. When a specific role is missed, there is a suggestion that the specific role will be missed by stopping a specific stop mode that does not stop if none of the roles are elected. If the player does not know the specific stop mode that stops when he misses, he cannot know that he has missed the elected special role. It is difficult to determine whether the particular role that was missed has been missed. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are won and at the first stop (stop operation of any reel while all reels are changing) If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the orange symbol cannot be drawn into the winning line, the control of pulling the plum role symbol into any of the winning lines is performed and the remaining reels In the case where the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the composition symbol of the orange part can be drawn into the winning line where the composition part of the plum part is stopped in FIG. Control to pull in.

  In addition, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) will be selected, and the constituent symbols for the Orange will stop on any winning line at the first stop However, at the time of the second stop (when one of the two reels is fluctuating and one of the reels is stopped), the constituent symbol of the orange part is changed to the winning line where the constituent part of the orange part is stopped at the first stop. Even if it was not possible to stop at the winning line where the constituent symbols of the orange role were stopped at the time of the second stop because the stop operation was performed at the stop operation position that could not be withdrawn, When one reel is moving and the last reel is stopped), the orange line will be displayed on the winning line where the orange pattern is stopped at the first stop. If the stop operation at the stop operation position retractable configuration pattern is performed, thereby performing the control to draw a structure pattern orange combination the winning line stop structure symbol orange combination was at the first stop.

  In other words, even if orange is missed at the time of the first stop or the second stop, if the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the remaining symbols can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, Control to align a part of the combination with the winning line is performed.

  Also, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are selected and the Plum is lost at the first stop or the second stop Similar control is performed.

  Therefore, even if orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are won, and orange is missed at the first stop or second stop When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position at which the structure of the orange combination can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, a part of the combination of the orange combination is aligned with the winning line. Even when the orange is missed at the time of 2 stops, it can be easily determined whether or not the orange has been missed depending on whether or not a part of the combination of orange matches the winning line. Also, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are selected and the Plum is lost at the first stop or the second stop Has the same effect.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are won, and the orange is missed during the first stop and the second stop. In the case of an error, the symbol that is used as an indicator (the structural symbol of the plum role when it is missed during the first stop, the structural symbol of the orange role that was stopped during the first stop when it is missed during the second stop) The stop position is regarded as a stop position where the structural symbol stops, and stop control is performed using a stop control table used when orange is not missed. For this reason, a stop control table for stopping the combination of orange combinations on the winning line, and a stop for stopping a part of the combination of orange combinations on the winning line when orange is missed at the first stop and the second stop. Since there is no need to prepare a separate control table, the stop control table is used even when control is performed to align a part of the combination of oranges with the winning line when orange is missed at the first stop or the second stop. Storage capacity can be reduced. The same applies to a case where a winning combination of plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) is won.

  (34-2) In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination is selected independently and the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination and special combination are simultaneously selected are different from each other. Although the expectation was given to the winning of the special role according to the stopping mode of the small role, the stopping mode at the time of winning the single role of the small role is different from the stopping mode at the time of simultaneous winning of the small role and the special role. There is a problem that it can be determined from the player whether or not the special combination is won according to the mode, and the expectation is lost. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are selected at the stop operation position where the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line When a stop operation is performed, control is performed to align the combination of orange roles on the winning line.

  Among them, when orange, bonus (A) + orange are won, out of the stop operation positions where the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of oranges is only applied to the winning lines L1 and L2. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be aligned and at a stop operation position that can be aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L6, control for aligning the combination of orange roles to the winning lines L1 and L2 is performed. The combination of the orange combination can be aligned only with the winning lines L3 and L4, and the combination of the orange combination is only performed when the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be aligned with the winning lines L1 and L2. , Control to align with L4.

  On the other hand, when orange + 1 (1) and bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, the combination of orange combinations can be drawn into the winning line. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination can be aligned only with the winning lines L3 and L4 and the stop operation position where the combination can be aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L6, the orange It is possible to align the combination of the winning combination to the winning lines L3 and L4, and it is possible to align the combination of the orange winning combination only to the winning lines L1 and L2, and stop operation at the stop operation position that cannot be aligned to the winning lines L3 and L4. Control is performed so that the combination of the orange combination is aligned with the winning lines L1 and L2 only when the is made.

  That is, when the orange, bonus (A) + orange is elected, and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of the orange combination is selected as the winning line L3, Priority is given to the winning lines L1 and L2 over L4, and orange + 1 (1) and bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of orange is drawn into the winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the winning combination can be performed, a control for aligning the combination of orange roles with priority to the winning lines L3 and L4 over the winning lines L1 and L2 is performed.

  Similarly, when the plum, bonus (B) + plum is selected and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the plums can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of the plums is selected as the winning line L3, The winning line L1 and L2 are controlled in preference to L4, and Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are selected, and the combination of plums is drawn into the winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the winning combination can be performed, control is performed so that the combination of plums is preferentially aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4 over the winning lines L1 and L2.

  With such a configuration, when orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum, bonus (B) + plum are selected, there is a possibility that the combination of orange combination or plum combination will be aligned on the winning lines L1, L2. If orange is +1 (1), bonus (A) + orange +1 (1), plum +1 (2), bonus (B) + plum +1 (2) is won There is a high possibility that a combination of winning combination or plum winning combination is aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4. In other words, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, Orange and Plum win, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 ( 1) Plum + 1 piece (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 piece (2), winning line where the combination of orange or plum combination is easy to match when orange and plum wins Is different.

  After the reel control as described above is performed, in the internal lottery, the bonus (A) in the total value of the winning probability of orange, bonus (A) + orange + orange is higher than the ratio of the winning probability of orange + 1. (1) Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) winning probability ratio of orange and bonus (1) A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1). Similarly, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) than the ratio of Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum winning probability to the total value of Plum winning probability Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + with the probability that the ratio of the winning probability of bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) in the total value of winning probability will be higher Plot + 1 (2) lottery.

  As a result, when Orange and 1 sheet (1) are elected at the same time, both Orange and 1 sheet (1) are won at the same time as Bonus (A). The percentage increases, and when the Plum and one (2) are won at the same time, the Plum and one (2) are won at the same time as the bonus (B). Therefore, the winning line of the combination of the orange role or the plum role is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4. Can change expectations.

  Furthermore, even if the winning line with the combination of orange role or plum role is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4, it is suggested that the special role may be won. However, it is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from a winning line with a combination of roles. Regardless of the winning line, a game for a special role being won The expectation of the person will not be lost.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, and stops at the stop operation position where the combination of Orange or Plum can be drawn into the winning line. When an operation is performed, control is performed so that the combination of orange combination or plum combination is aligned with the winning lines L1 and L2 at a higher rate than the winning lines L3 and L4, and orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 Sheet (1), Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are selected and stop at the stop operation position where the combination of orange or plum can be drawn into the winning line When an operation is performed, control is performed to align the combination of orange combination or plum combination with the winning lines L3 and L4 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1 and L2. However, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum are selected and stop at the stop operation position where the combination of Orange or Plum can be drawn into the winning line. When an operation is performed, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of orange combination or plum combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of orange combination or plum combination is applied only to the winning lines L1 and L2. Control of aligning, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are elected and play the role of Orange Or, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where a combination of plums can be drawn into the winning line, a combination of oranges or plums is won. It may perform control to align only in L3, L4.

  In this example, in the internal lottery, the ratio of the winning probability of bonus (A) + orange to the total value of the winning probability of orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (the ratio of the winning probability of Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) in the winning value of Orange + 1 (1) is different) 1) Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) lottery, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange has been won, at the stop operation position where the combination of orange can be drawn into the winning line When a stop operation is performed, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line. By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned is different from when the stop operation is performed at the active stop operation position, the player's winning for the special role is determined by the difference in the winning line with the combination of orange roles The degree of expectation can be changed, but in the internal lottery, the bonus (A) + orange + 1 (in the total value of the winning probability of orange, bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) ( The ratio of the winning probability of 1) and orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange winning probability ratio of the total value of the bonus (A) + orange winning probability is different from the orange, Lottery of bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), orange, bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination can be drawn into the winning line, and Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange is selected. By controlling so that the winning line that is preferentially aligned differs between when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the winning combination can be drawn into the winning line, the winning line with the orange combined combination is controlled. Depending on the difference, the player's expectation for winning the special role may be changed. The same applies to the case of plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2).

  (34-3) In a conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific combination that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when no combination is won. When a specific combination is missed, if there is no winning combination, there will be a change in the reel stop mode by stopping a specific stop mode that will not stop. There is a problem that there is only one type of specific stop mode that stops when the specific combination is missed by performing the stop operation at the same timing, and the stop mode of the reel becomes monotonous. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  When the orange and bonus (A) + orange are selected, and the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination cannot be drawn into the winning line, the predetermined chance except for the orange combination or the plum combination is won. Priority is given to the winning lines L1 and L2 over the lines L3 and L4, and orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of orange roles is won When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be drawn into the line, control is performed so that the chance lines are preferentially aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4 over the winning lines L1 and L2.

  Similarly, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of plums cannot be drawn into the winning line, a chance is won from the winning lines L3 and L4. Priority is given to the lines L1 and L2, and a control operation that prevents the combination of plums from being drawn into the winning line is selected as plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) When the stop operation is performed at the position, the control is performed so that the chance lines are preferentially aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4 over the winning lines L1 and L2.

  As a result, even if Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange is won, or Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) is won, If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of the orange combination will be aligned on the winning line, but if orange, bonus (A) + orange are won, In other words, if only orange out of orange (1) is elected alone and the orange is missed, chances are high that the chances are aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, orange + 1 (1), bonus ( A) If + Orange + 1 (1) is elected, that is, if both Orange and 1 (1) are elected at the same time and lose the orange, chances will be entered Likely to align the line L3, L4. Similarly, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, or when Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) is won, If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of plums will be aligned on the winning line, but if Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is selected, That is, if only one of the plums (1) (2) wins alone and misses the plum, chances are high that the winning lines will be aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and the plum + 1 (2), bonus ( B) If + Plum + 1 (2) is won, that is, if both Plum and 1 (2) are won at the same time and the Plum is missed, chances can be aligned on the winning lines L3 and L4 High .

  As a result, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won and Orange and Plum are missed, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1 ), Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are won and the orange and plums are missed. It is possible to diversify the manner in which the reels are stopped at the time.

  The chances are that Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum was won and Orange and Plum were missed, Orange +1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange +1 (1) Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are controlled to be aligned to any of the winning lines on condition that the orange and plum are missed. When a combination or combination of combinations is not won, chances are not matched to any winning line. For this reason, the possibility of winning a special role is surely suggested by having chance chances on any of the winning lines.

  In this example, as described above, the bonus (A) when the orange and one sheet (1) are won at the same time is more than the case where the orange and one sheet (1) are won alone. ) At the same time, the percentage of winning prizes will increase, and a bonus will be awarded when a plum and one piece (2) of the plum and one piece (2) are won at the same time, rather than when the plum is won alone. B) Since the winning percentage will increase at the same time, the game for winning the special role depends on whether the winning line with the chance is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4. Can change the expectation of a person.

  Furthermore, even if the winning line with the chance line is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4, it is suggested that the special role may be won, but the chance line is It is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from the line of winning lines, and the player's expectation that a special role has been won, regardless of the winning line. A feeling is not spoiled.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won and Orange and Plum are lost, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 The winning line where the chances are easy to match will be changed when winning (1), plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) and orange and plum are missed. However, chances 1 and 2 with different display modes are determined, and orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum, bonus (B) + plum is won and orange +1 is lost and orange +1 Sheet (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 sheet (1), Plum + 1 sheet (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 sheet (2) are selected and Orange and Plum are removed. And if spilled, in appearance and easy chance eyes of types may be changed.

  In this example, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is elected and Orange and Plum are missed, the chance is won at a higher rate than the winning lines L3 and L4. Control to align with lines L1 and L2, and orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) When the orange and plum are missed, the control is performed so that the chances are aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1 and L2, but the orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum If the bonus (B) + plum is won and the orange or plum is missed, control is performed to align the chances to only the winning lines L1 and L2. +1 sheet (1), Bonus (A) + Orange +1 sheet (1), Plum +1 sheet (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 sheet (2) are elected and Orange and Plum are lost You may make it perform the control which aligns a chance line only to the winning lines L3 and L4.

  In addition, in this example, when orange and one sheet (1) are elected at the same time, it is won at the same time as bonus (A) than when orange and one sheet (1) are elected alone. The ratio of the winning combination is higher when the Plum and one piece (2) are won at the same time than the case where the Plum and one piece (2) are won alone. By increasing the winning percentage, the player's expectation for winning the special role depends on whether the winning line with the chances is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4. For example, when the chances are aligned with any of the winning lines, the process proceeds to RT described later, and when the chances are aligned with the winning lines L1 and L2, the first Move to RT When the game line is aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4, the second RT is different from the first RT in terms of the advantage (RT termination condition, winning probability of the re-gamer, presence / absence notification of the winning combination or notification ratio) It is also possible to adopt a configuration for shifting to RT, and by adopting such a configuration, when orange or plum is missed, the display mode of the reels is not only diversified, but the display mode that the same chance eyes are aligned on the winning line Even so, when orange and plum are elected alone, RT and orange + 1 (1) and plum + 1 (2) that may move when orange and plum are dropped are won In this case, the advantage can be changed between the orange and the RT which may shift when the plum is dropped.

  (35) In the embodiment described above, in a game where a special combination is won and a small combination with a payout number of 3 or more (hereinafter referred to as a normal small combination) is won, The combination of symbols corresponding to the normal small combination is preferentially derived, and a small combination (hereinafter referred to as a specific small combination) in which the number of payouts is smaller than 3 is provided when the special combination is won. In a game in which the specific small role is won, reel control is performed in which the symbol combination corresponding to the big bonus or the regular bonus is given priority over the symbol combination corresponding to the specific small role. An example was described. In addition to such reel control, the following reel control may be performed.

  When an equivalent small combination with the same number of medals as the number of bets and a special combination are elected, for example, reel control may be performed to preferentially win an equivalent small combination over a special combination. Thereby, the next game can be started with the medals that are awarded to the equivalent small role and paid out, and the player can be expected to win the normal small role in the game. Further, when the equivalent small combination and the special combination are elected, the reel control may be performed so that the special combination is preferentially won over the equivalent small combination. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of games and medals required for winning a special combination.

  Also, the number of medals paid out changes according to the number of winning lines like strawberry, for example, for a special small role that may be less than the number of bets or more than the number of bets, When a special role is elected, the special small role is given priority over the special role when operated in an operating procedure that allows the special small role to be awarded so that the number of payouts is greater than the number of bets. The special role is given priority over the special small role when it is operated according to the operating procedure that allows the special small role to be awarded so that the number of payouts is less than the number of bets. Reel control may be performed so as to win a prize. Thereby, taking into account the operation procedure, it is possible to reduce as much as possible that the display result that is a disadvantageous game result for the player is derived, and the display result that is advantageous to the player is given priority. Can be derived.

  In addition, in a game where a special role is won and a small role is selected, a symbol combination corresponding to the small role is selected rather than the special role regardless of the number of payouts of the selected small role. Reel control that is preferentially derived may be performed.

  Further, the normal small combination and the specific small combination may be simultaneously read out as the lottery target combination to be selected. In this case, for example, when a special small role and a specific small role are elected in a state where the special role winning is carried over, the special role, the normal small role, and the specific small role are selected. At the same time, it will be a winning situation. In this case, reel control is performed so that the normal small role is given priority over the special role and the specified small role, and when the normal small role cannot be won, the special role is given priority over the specific small role. The reel control may be performed so that the reel control is performed to win a specific small combination when the normal small combination and the special combination cannot be won. As a result, even when the normal small combination and the specific small combination are won at the same time, it is possible to reduce the display result that is a disadvantageous game result for the player as much as possible, which is advantageous for the player. A display result as a game result can be preferentially derived.

  (36) As an example of the RT1 end condition in the above-described embodiment, an example that is established by winning a bonus, winning a fall replay or a promotion replay has been described. However, the end condition of RT1 is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be further satisfied by using a predetermined number of games and winning in a predetermined end lottery. In addition, as an example of the RT2 end condition, a case where a bonus is won and a special outcome is derived has been described. However, the end condition of RT2 is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be further satisfied by digesting the prescribed number of games and winning in a predetermined end lottery. In addition, as an example of the preparation mode end condition, a case where the bonus mode is won, the special outcome is stopped, or the like has been described. However, the end condition of the preparation mode is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be further established by winning a fall replay prize, a prescribed number of games, and a predetermined end lottery. As a result, the types of timings at which the RT or the preparation mode ends can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting a bet number and giving a game value associated with winning is described as an example. However, the slot machine embodying the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  (38) In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting the bet number using medals and credits is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the bet number is set using a game ball. Or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in game balls, and a take-in ball that detects game balls taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set the number of bets using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a winning occurs.

  (39) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18D and the like, the lottery condition is satisfied and the lottery condition is satisfied every time a period of 5 games is consumed as a predetermined period when the AT is not AT. An example in which the 2AT lottery is performed has been described. However, the predetermined period is not limited to a period in which the game is consumed a predetermined number of times, but is a period until a specific winning combination (for example, melon) is won or won a predetermined number of times, a period until a predetermined number of times for a fall replay, and a predetermined time elapses. It may be a period of time. Thereby, when it is non-AT, a player can be made to pay attention to whether a predetermined period passes, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  (40) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a main CPU, 41b ROM, 41c RAM, 42 random number generation circuit, 43 sampling circuit, 51 liquid crystal Display, 90 stage control board, 91 sub control unit, 91a sub CPU, 91b ROM, 91c RAM, 92 display control circuit, 141 VDP, 142 CGROM, 155 temporary storage memory, 156 frame buffer memory.

Claims (1)

A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
After displaying the variable display unit in a variable manner, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the display result,
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result is derived;
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result according to the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation of the derivation operation means;
After the start condition is established, the determination result of the pre-determining means becomes a predetermined result indicating that the predetermined winning is permitted, and a display result different from the predetermined display result for generating the predetermined winning is derived. Preparation state control means for controlling to a predetermined preparation state until an end condition is satisfied;
Advantageous state control means for controlling the advantageous state advantageous to the player over a predetermined normal state;
When the end condition is satisfied in the preparatory state, the control is performed to the normal state. a normal state control means for controlling the pre-Symbol normal state when the end indication results obtained are derived,
A notification period control means for controlling the notification condition at a predetermined trigger in the progress of the game, and controlling the notification period to notify the predetermined information according to the setting of the notification condition;
Subject to the limitation that before Symbol broadcasting period, and a notification means for notifying a result when information corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determining means,
When the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes the specific result, the notification unit notifies the specific result time information corresponding to the specific result,
The derivation control unit is configured to display the end display result when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes the specific result and the derivation operation unit is operated in an end procedure corresponding to the specific result. When the derivation operation means is operated in an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to the specific result, control for deriving a display result different from the end display result is performed.
The advantage of the control related to the notification condition by the notification period control means is higher when it is a period other than the notification period of the period controlled to the advantageous state than when it is in the normal state. The notification period is different between when it is a period other than the notification period of the period controlled in the advantageous state and when it is the notification period of the period controlled in the advantageous state. The control means performs control related to the notification condition,
In pre-Symbol ready, even the notification condition is set without being controlled to the notification period, the predetermined display result by said notification means, even when the determination result of said predetermination means becomes the predetermined result for a given result when information for derivation not be notified, in a state after the termination condition is satisfied is controlled in the broadcasting period by the notification condition is set, the predetermination wherein by said notifying means when the determination result of the means becomes the predetermined result prescribed result when information is Ru is broadcast, the slot machine.

Images